2020 Nissan Pathfinder User Manual

2020 PATHFINDER

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger

vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to

chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other

reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as

necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area

and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when

servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any

questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a 4WD mark is placed at the begin-

ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss

of control or an accident. For additional

information, refer to “Driving safety pre-

cautions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passen-

ger car because it has a higher center

of gravity for off-road use. As with

other vehicles with features of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent

to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-

cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-

tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-

sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner

section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. Refer to NISSAN CUSTOMER

CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s

Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer

to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumer[email protected]om

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.c[email protected]om

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel ................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations ...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights .....................0-9

1. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)

2. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-53)

4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-12)

5. Seat belts with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-18,

1-53)

6. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-53)

7. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-53)

8. Seats (P. 1-2)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-53)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) (P. 1-30)

11. Second row seat top tether strap

anchor (located on bottom of

seatback) (P. 1-30)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2466

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)

2. Engine hood (P. 3-23)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)

4. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-12)

5. Power windows (P. 2-66)

6. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-2)

Keys (P. 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-36)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-28)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-28)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-40)

10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25)

Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-40)

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system (P. 2-40)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2560

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear window wiper and washer

switch (P. 2-37)

2. Towing (P. 10-17)

3. Liftgate release (P. 3-23)

Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-11)

4. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-79)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25)

6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-30)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-30)

7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2561

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box (P. 2-58)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-34)

3. Map lights (P. 2-72)

4. Power moonroof (if so equipped)

(P. 2-69)

5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-58)

6. Cup holders (P. 2-58)

7. Console box (P. 2-58)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2458

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-32)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-40)

3. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-43)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-53)

Horn (P. 2-45)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-11)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

6. Twin trip odometer reset switch

(P. 2-5)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (P. 2-37)

8. Control panel*

9. Center display*

Navigation system*

(if so equipped)

10. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-53)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-53)

12. Glove box (P. 2-58)

13. Automatic heater and air

conditioning controls (P. 4-33)

LII2409

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

14. Audio system controls*

15. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

16. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-11)

17. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)

18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-33)

19. Control panel and vehicle informa-

tion display switches (P. 2-20)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

20. Hood release (P. 3-23)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-50)

TOW mode switch (P. 2-53)

Liftgate instrument panel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

Warning systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-48)

Power inverter switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parenthesis for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

VQ35DD engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

3. Drive belt location (P.8-16)

4. Fuse box (P. 8-21)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)

8. Fuse box (P. 8-21)

9. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)

10. Battery (P. 8-14)

11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

12. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI3291

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-12

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking

(AEB) system

warning light

2-12

Brake warning

light

2-12

Charge warning

light

2-13

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-13

Master warning

light

2-15

Warning

light

Name Page

Power steering

warning light

2-15

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-15

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-16

Indicator

light

Name Page

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-16

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-16

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-16

Indicator

light

Name Page

Hill descent con-

trol system ON

indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-16

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-17

Overdrive OFF

indicator light

2-18

Security indicator

light

2-18

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green)

2-18

Slip indicator light 2-18

TOW mode ON

indicator light

2-18

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator

light

Name Page

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-18

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-18

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

MEMO

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ............................... 1-5

2nd row bench seat adjustment...............1-7

3rd row bench seat adjustment .............. 1-9

Armrests .....................................1-10

Flexible seating ...............................1-10

Head restraints/headrests ......................1-12

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .................................1-13

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components........................1-14

Remove......................................1-14

Removable (without Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Mobile

Entertainment System (MES) only) ............1-15

Install.........................................1-15

Adjust ........................................1-15

Folding head restraint/headrest..............1-17

Seatbelts.......................................1-18

Precautions on seat belt usage ...............1-18

Seat belt warning light........................1-21

Pregnant women.............................1-21

Injured persons...............................1-21

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-21

Seat belt extenders..........................1-26

Seat belt maintenance ...................... 1-27

Child safety..................................... 1-27

Infants ......................................1-28

Small children ...............................1-28

Larger children ..............................1-28

Child restraints .................................1-30

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-30

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ............................1-32

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.................................1-35

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ......................... 1-37

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH .....................1-40

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts..............1-43

Booster

seats ...............................1-49

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-53

Precautions on SRS..........................1-53

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-72

Supplemental air bag warning light.......... 1-73

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it

while you slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position. Release the

bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2160 LRS2161

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired po-

sition is achieved.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Move the lever as shown to adjust the seat

lumbar area.

LRS2202 LRS2132

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait

30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the en-

gine is off. This will discharge the bat-

tery.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

LRS2662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Move the lever as shown (manual) or push

the switch as shown (power) to adjust the

seat lumbar area.

LRS2636

Manual (if so equipped)

LRS2132

Power (if so equipped)

LRS2270

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar

䊊

up and hold it

while you slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position. Release the

bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever

䊊

and lean back. To bring the seatback

forward, pull the lever

䊊

up and lean your

body forward. Release the lever to lock the

seatback in position.

The recline feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat and ad-

just the seat belt properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

Outboard seats

LRS2143

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

One touch walk-in function

The 3rd row can be accessed from outside

the vehicle by using the seatback release

lever located on the upper outboard side of

the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat. If

a child safety seat is installed on the pas-

senger’s side of the 2nd row seat, the 3rd

row can be accessed without removing the

child safety seat.

Multi-mode

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and

seatback are locked properly.

CAUTION

∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or

foot or bump your head when operat-

ing the walk-in seat.

∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row

seat to pinch, hit any part of your body

or other people when operating the

2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path

is clear of all objects before moving

the seat.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the ve-

hicle, lift up on the seatback lever located

on the upper outboard side of the seat-

back on the 2nd row bench seat. This will

release the back of the seat and fold up the

seat cushion. This will also release the seat

tracks so you will be able to slide the seat

forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to

the 3rd row.

To return the seat to a locked position,

push the upper seatback rearward until

the seatback and tracks are locked. Push

the seat cushion down.

Child seat access mode

The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat

can be slid forward for easy entry or exit

from the 3rd row bench seat without a child

safety seat being removed.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the ve-

hicle, lift up on the seatback lever located

on the upper outboard side of the seat-

back on the 2nd row bench seat. This will

release the seatback. Then tilt the seat and

release the tracks so you will be able to

slide the seat forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to

the rear seats.

To return the seat to a locked position,

push the upper seatback rearward until

the seatback and track are locked.

LRS2142

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Do not leave a child in the child safety

seat when operating the child seat ac-

cess mode.

∙ When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and

seatback are locked properly.

CAUTION

∙ Be careful not to pinch your hand or

foot or bump your head when operat-

ing the walk-in seat.

∙ Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

∙ Be careful not to allow the 2nd row

seat to pinch, hit any part of your body

or other people when operating the

2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path

is clear of all objects before moving

the seat.

Exiting the 3rd row

To exit the 3rd row from either seating po-

sition, lift the upper seatback release lever

to the uppermost position. This will release

the back of the seat, then fold the seat

cushion up and release the tracks.

Slide the entire seat forward.

To return the seat to a locked position,

push the upper seatback rearward until

the seatback and track are locked.

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and

seatback are locked properly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your hand or

foot or bump your head when operat-

ing the walk-in seat.

3RD ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch

located on the outside corner of each seat-

back. Lean back until the desired angle is

obtained.

To bring the seatback forward again, pull

up on the latch and pull the seatback up-

right until the desired angle is obtained.

The recline feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

LRS2913

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat and ad-

just the seat belt properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

ARMRESTS

The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped

with an armrest. Pull the armrest down as

shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats when

they are in the fold-down position. In a

collision, people riding in these areas

without proper restraints are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched in the

seat.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may pro-

vide significant protection against in-

jury in an accident. Always replace

and adjust them properly if they have

been removed for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests are

removed for any reason, they should

be securely stored to prevent them

from causing injury to passengers or

damage to the vehicle in case of sud-

den braking or an accident.

LRS2924

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for

maximum cargo hauling:

1. Make sure that the head

restraints/headrests are lowered or re-

moved. To remove the head

restraint/headrest, push and hold the

lock knob while moving the head

restraint/headrest in an upward direc-

tion. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat

belt hooks found on the sides of the

vehicle.

3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of

the outboard seats to fold the seat-

backs flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seat-

back until it latches in place.

LRS2144

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Folding the 3rd row seats

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum

cargo capacity:

1. Pull the strap

䊊

to release the head

restraint/headrest forward.

2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat

belt hooks

䊊

found on the sides of the

cargo area.

3. Pull up on the latch

䊊

located in the

upper corner of each seatback and

lower the seatback forward over the

seat base.

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating

position:

1. Use the pull straps

䊊

to raise each

seatback. Pull back until the seatback

latches into position. Make sure to

properly raise each seatback to an

upright and secured position.

2. Do not use the pull strap to return the

head restraint/headrest to the upright

position. Pull back on the head

restraint/headrest until it latches in the

upright position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraints/headrests must be returned

to the upright position to properly pro-

tect vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalk, except for Genuine NISSAN acces-

sories specifically tested for use with

the vehicle’s head restraint/headrest

stalk. Do not remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

LRS2915

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating

positions equipped with head restraints/

headrests.

䉱 Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2308 LRS2300

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVABLE (without Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat

Mobile Entertainment System

(MES) only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest

from vehicles equipped with Dual Head

Restraint/Headrest Rear Seat Mobile

Entertainment System (MES). Removal

may damage the system wiring.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches)

䊊

must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2302 LRS2303 WRS0134

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST

To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the

strap located on the rear of the head

restraint/headrest.

If the head restraint/headrest has been

folded, make sure that it is returned to the

upright position.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knobs are engaged

in the notches before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraint/headrest must be returned to

the upright position to properly protect

vehicle occupants.

LRS2307

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2160

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle

䊊

until you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙ The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

LRS2674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips

䊊

as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack

䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle

䊊

. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service, or to learn more about seat

belt operation.

䊊

Shoulder belt height adjust button

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front and 2nd row outboard

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section.

To adjust, press the button

䊊

and then

move the shoulder belt anchor to the de-

sired position so that the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

WRS0139 SSS0896

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

falling off of your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

∙ The shoulder belt should rest on the

middle of the shoulder. It must not

rest against the neck.

∙ Be sure that the seat belt is not

twisted in any way.

∙ Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor

is secured by trying to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down af-

ter adjustment.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when

folding down the rear seats, hook the rear

seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and are available for the:

∙ Driver and front passenger seating po-

sition

∙ 2nd and 3rd row seating position

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

3rd row shown; 2nd row similar

LRS2157

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙ Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

LRS2690

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

–

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child restraint

anchorages. The child restraint will

not be properly installed using the

damaged anchorage, and a child

could be seriously injured or killed in

a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

–

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-

vided to install child restraints in the follow-

ing positions only:

∙ 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating

positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the 2nd row center position using

the LATCH system anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

LATCH system lower anchor locations -

bench seat

LRS2922

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorages, and a child could be

seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

to help you locate the LATCH lower an-

chors.

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS3036

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS2930

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap.Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following

locations:

∙ 2nd row bench on the bottom of the

seatback in the seating positions

shown.

∙ 3rd row bench on the bottom of the

seatback on the passenger side seat-

ing position as shown.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

3rd row bench seat

LRS2916

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2997

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2996

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats

using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

LRS2995

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2994

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (2nd row bench out-

board seating positions only).

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point

䊊

as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and,

therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (2nd row in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS2394

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 4 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Forward-facing – step 10

LRS0865

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, re-

moval and installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point

䊊

as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap

䊊

shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point

䊊

as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack. Make sure the head

restraint/headrest does not contact

the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Anchor point

3rd row bench seat

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child re-

straint with a top tether strap can only

be used on the passenger side seating

position. Do not place in the driver’s side

seating position and attempt to angle

the tether strap to the passenger side

seating position.

3rd row bench seat

LRS2916

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The passenger side of the 3rd row bench

seat is the seating position that can use a

top tether strap. First, secure the child re-

straint with the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap

䊊

shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point

䊊

as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack. Make sure the head

restraint/headrest does not contact

the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety,”

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the 2nd or 3rd rows or in the front pas-

senger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454

2nd row center position

LRS0451

2nd row outboard position

LRS0452

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light

may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

LRS0865

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the

curtain air bags are designed to inflate and

remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the driver and

front passenger seat belts and is not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should al-

ways be correctly worn and the occupant

seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. For additional information, refer

to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

WRS0031

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained,leaning forward,sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on

the floor. The side air bag and curtain

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg

or face near the side air bag on the

side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats or

rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

LRS3119 WRS0032

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

SSS0162 SSS0159

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

4. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

8. Satellite sensors (driver’s side shown;

passenger side similar)

9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

10. Crash zone sensor

LRS3059

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the

seatback pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation about installing and using

child restraints, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupation classi-

fication sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensor is also monitored. Based on

information from the sensor, only one front

air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-

tionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected

on the front passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light will be illuminated. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section. One

front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light

which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION

PASSENGER AIR BAG

STATUS LIGHT (

)

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody

Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat

ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor system,

please refer to “Normal operation” and

“Troubleshooting” in this section.

LRS0865

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints and to use the

ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflat-

ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

check system status by using a special

tool. However, until you have confirmed

with a dealer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. This is nor-

mal system operation and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-

tus is monitored by the occupant clas-

sification system, and is used as an in-

put to determine occupancy status. So,

it is highly recommended that the front

passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system generally keeps the clas-

sification locked during driving, so it is

important that you confirm that the

front passenger is properly classified

prior to driving. However, the occupant

classification sensor may recalculate the

weight of the occupant under some con-

ditions (both while driving and when

stopped), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated

as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-

ger and no objects on the front pas-

senger seat, the vehicle should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails in all three rows. All of the informa-

tion, cautions and warnings in this

manual must be followed. The side air

bags and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions, al-

though they may inflate if the forces in an-

WRS0381

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

other type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity impact. They are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the ve-

hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in

certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain

air bags help to cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions in all rows. They

can help save lives and reduce serious in-

juries. However, an inflating side air bag or

curtain air bag may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the side

air bag. Rear seat passengers should be

seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bags

and curtain air bags inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a

short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It

is also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air

bags and curtain air bag system and guide

the buyer to the appropriate sections in

this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light

is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional

information, refer to "Supplemental air bag

warning light" in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

WRS0885

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred. These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked to verify it is still functioning

correctly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the im-

pact. Failure to verify proper OCS

function may result in an improper air

bag deployment resulting in injury or

death.

1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-4

Speedometer and odometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-6

Fuel gauge ...................................2-7

Distance To Empty (DTE)......................2-7

Compass (if so equipped) .......................2-8

Compass display .............................2-8

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders .......................................2-11

Checking lights ...............................2-11

Warning lights ...............................2-12

Indicator lights ..............................2-16

Audible reminders...........................2-19

Vehicle information display .....................2-19

How to use the vehicle information

display ......................................2-20

Startup display ..............................2-20

Resetting the trip computer .................2-21

Settings .....................................2-21

Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators...............................2-29

Security systems ...............................2-34

Vehicle security system .....................2-34

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-35

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-37

Switch operation ............................2-37

Rear switch operation .......................2-38

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch................2-39

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-40

Headlight control switch.....................2-40

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system ......................................2-43

Instrument brightness control...............2-43

Turn signal switch ...........................2-43

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-44

Horn ...........................................2-45

Climate controlled seat switches

(if so equipped) .................................2-45

ated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-46

Heated 2nd row seat switches

(if so equipped) .................................2-47

Heated steering wheel switch Type A

(if so equipped) .................................2-48

Heated steering wheel Type B (if so equipped) . . 2-49

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-50

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)......2-50

Warning systems switch (if so equipped) .......2-51

Power inverter switch (if so equipped) ..........2-52

TOW mode switch ..............................2-53

E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) .............2-53

Rear Door Alert .................................2-54

Power outlets ..................................2-55

12v outlets...................................2-55

120v outlet (if so equipped) ..................2-56

Extended storage switch .......................2-57

Storage ........................................2-58

Front-door pockets..........................2-58

Console side pockets........................2-58

Seatback pockets ...........................2-59

Storagetrays................................2-59

Glovebox....................................2-60

Console box .................................2-60

Overhead sunglasses storage...............2-61

Cup holders .................................2-62

Cargo area storage bin ......................2-64

Luggage hooks..............................2-64

Roofrack....................................2-65

Windows .......................................2-66

Power windows .............................2-66

Dual panel moonroof (if so equipped)...........2-69

Power moonroof ............................2-69

Interior lights ...................................2-72

Console light ................................2-73

Map lights ...................................2-73

Personal lights ..............................2-73

Cargo light ..................................2-74

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) .................................2-74

Programming HomeLink® ...................2-75

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers................2-77

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..................................2-77

ogramming trouble-diagnosis ............2-77

Clearing the programmed information ......2-78

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button.......................................2-78

If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-78

1. Vents (P. 4-32)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-40)

3. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-43)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-53)

Horn (P. 2-45)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-11)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

6. Twin trip odometer reset switch

(P. 2-5)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (P. 2-37)

8. Control panel*

9. Center display*

Navigation system*

(if so equipped)

10. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-53)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-53)

12. Glove box (P. 2-58)

13. Automatic heater and air

conditioning controls (P. 4-33)

LII2409

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

14. Audio system controls*

15. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

16. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-11)

17. Cruise control switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)

18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-33)

19. Control panel and vehicle informa-

tion display switches (P. 2-20)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

20. Hood release (P. 3-23)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-50)

TOW mode switch (P. 2-53)

Liftgate instrument panel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

Warning systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-48)

Power inverter switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect®

Owner’s Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parenthesis for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

Odometer

Twin trip odometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the meter clus-

ter. The odometer is located within the ve-

hicle information display.

LIC3597

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer

䊊

are displayed in the vehicle information

display when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch

䊊

on the right

side of the instrument panel to change the

display as follows:

Trip

→ Trip → Odometer Mile-

age → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊

for more

than 1 second resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to

empty information is also available. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

LIC2218 LIC3460

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture is within the normal range

䊊

when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range,reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon

as safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

For additional information, refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual

for immediate action required.

LIC2219 LIC2220

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-

ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The low fuel warning message shows in

the vehicle information display when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The

indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)

Displays the estimated distance the ve-

hicle can be driven before refueling. The

value is calculated based on recent fuel

economy, the amount of fuel remaining in

the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump-

tion.

Changes in driving patterns or conditions

can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,

the value displayed may differ from the ac-

tual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to “---” when the

fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to

the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:

∙ The DTE value after refill is estimated

based on recent fuel economy and

amount of fuel added.

∙ If a small amount of fuel is added, or

the ignition is on during refueling, the

display may not be updated.

∙ Conditions that affect the fuel

economy will also affect the esti-

mated DTE value (city/highway driv-

ing, idle time, remote start time, ter-

rain, seasonal weather, added vehicle

weight, added deflectors, roof racks,

etc.).

LIC2222

Instruments and controls 2-7

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism

and indicates the heading direction of the

vehicle.

With the ignition placed in the ON position,

press the

button as described in the

charts below to activate various features of

the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Press and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

10 seconds

Compass enters calibration

mode

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button for about one sec-

ond when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position to toggle the compass di-

rection display

䊊

on or off. The display will

indicate the direction that the vehicle is

heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in three com-

plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-

ing your vehicle on your everyday route.

The compass will be calibrated once it has

tracked three complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

2-8 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause false

compass readings. Follow these instruc-

tions to set the variance for your particular

location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the

button for

about 8 seconds. The current zone

number will appear in the display. Re-

lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone

map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the

button repeatedly to

toggle through the zone numbers until

the desired number appears in the dis-

play. Once you have selected a zone

number, the display will show a com-

pass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-

tomatic correction function. If the correct

direction is not shown, follow this proce-

dure.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-9

1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the

button for about 9 sec-

onds. The display will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the

vehicle in three complete circles at a

maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display

should return to normal.

∙ If the compass deviates from the cor-

rect indication soon after repeated ad-

justment, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ The compass may not indicate the cor-

rect compass point in tunnels or while

driving up or down a steep hill. (The

compass returns to the correct com-

pass point when the vehicle moves to

an area where the geomagnetism is

stabilized.)

CAUTION

∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system

warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

or Brake warning light

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light

(green)

Charge warning light Front passenger air bag status light Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) TOW mode ON indicator light

Master warning light Hill descent control system ON

indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

, ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display

between the speedometer and tachom-

eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings

and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It illumi-

nates briefly and then turns off.

This light illuminates when the AEB system

is set to OFF in the vehicle information dis-

play.

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-

tem is on, it may indicate that the system is

unavailable. For additional information, re-

fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

2-12 Instruments and controls

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning also appears in the vehicle in-

formation display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-

gency” sections of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-13

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of

the following are displayed on the vehicle

information display.

∙ No key warning

∙ Low fuel warning

∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning

∙ Parking brake release

∙ Door open warning

∙ Low tire pressure warning

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

Power steering warning

light

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light

illuminates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering is not function-

ing properly and may need servicing. Have

the power steering checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-

tem does not activate the warning light for

the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information, re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light will

be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

off depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and

then turns off.

The light comes on when the hill descent

control system is activated.

2-16 Instruments and controls

If the hill descent control switch is on and

the indicator light blinks, the system is not

engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the hill descent switch is on, the sys-

tem may not be functioning properly. Have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control switch” in this section and “Hill

descent control system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display. If the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The

light should turn off

after a few driving trips. If the

light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. You do not need

to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Overdrive OFF indicator

light

The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates

when the overdrive OFF mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indi-

cates that the security systems equipped

on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or head-

lights are on (not including the Daytime

Running Lights system or signature lights).

If the headlight switch is in the AUTO posi-

tion, the side light and headlight indicator

light will illuminate when the headlights

turn on. For additional information, refer to

“Headlight and turn signal switch” in this

section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Ve-

hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-

erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact

that the road surface is slippery and the

vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The

indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

TOW mode ON indicator

light

This light comes on when the tow mode

function is on.

For additional information, refer to “Tow

mode switch” in this section.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-

cates the VDC system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine and the system will operate normally.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the

indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-18 Instruments and controls

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Key reminder chime (if so

equipped)

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is

opened while the ignition switch is placed

in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the

OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent

Key left in the vehicle. Make sure the igni-

tion switch is placed in the LOCK position,

and take the Intelligent Key with you when

leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to

AUTO before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door

buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if

any one of the following improper opera-

tions is found.

∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve-

hicle when locking the doors.

∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the

vehicle when operating the vehicle.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check

both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

The vehicle information display is located

to the left of the speedometer. It displays

such items as:

∙ Vehicle settings

∙ Trip computer information

∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if

so equipped)

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW) information (if

so equipped)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so

equipped)

LIC2205

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-19

∙ Cruise control system information (if so

equipped)

∙ Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

information (if so equipped)

∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped)

operation information

∙ Indicators and warnings

∙ Tire Pressure information

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

navigated using the

, , ENTER ,

and

buttons located on the steering

wheel.

— select/enter the vehicle infor-

mation display menu items or to

change from one display screen to the

next (i.e. trip, settings, fuel economy)

— navigate through the items in

the vehicle information display

ENTER — change or select an item in

the vehicle information display

— go back to the previous menu

The ENTER and

buttons also control

audio and control panel functions. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC

position the screens that display in the ve-

hicle information include:

∙ Active system status (if so equipped)

∙ Trip computer

∙ Fuel economy

∙ Distance to empty

∙ Tire pressure information

∙ 4WD (if so equipped)

∙ Navigation (if so equipped)

∙ Audio

∙ Warnings

Warnings will only display if there are any

present. For additional information on

warnings and indicators refer to “Vehicle

information display warnings and indica-

tors” in this section.

LIC2245

2-20 Instruments and controls

To control what items display in the vehicle

information display, refer to “Main menu se-

lection” in this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER

1. Press the button until you reach

the trip computer mode.

2. Press the

button again for more

than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel

consumption, average speed, distance

to empty, and journey time.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the

information displayed in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

∙ Driver Assistance

∙ Vehicle Settings

∙ Main Menu Selection

∙ Body Color

∙ Maintenance

∙ Alarms

∙ Language

∙ Unit

∙ Welcome Effect

∙ Factory Reset

Driver Assistance

The driver assistance menu allows the user

to change the various driving aids, parking

aids and braking features.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids.

Blind Spot Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional

information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Parking Aids Displays available parking aids.

Sensor Allows user to turn the parking sensor on or off.

Display Allows user to turn the parking sensor display on or off.

Volume Allows user to change the volume of the parking aid chimes.

Range Allows user to select the range in which the parking sensors will activate.

Emergency Braking Displays the available emergency braking options.

System Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings menu allows the user

to change the settings for lights, wipers,

locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options.

Off When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Alert & Horn When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.

Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.

Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Wiper with Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.

I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped) Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock feature on or off. When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door is un-

locked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be un-

locked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors

will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Auto Door Unlock Displays the available door unlock options.

Off When selected, doors will have to be manually unlocked.

IGN Off When selected, doors will unlock when the ignition is off.

Shift into P When selected, doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off.

Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started

remotely.

Battery Saver Allows user to turn the battery saver feature on or off.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Exit Seat Slide (if so equipped) When the exit seat slide is on the driver’s seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in

the ACC position, the driver’s seat will move to the previous set position.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

Exit Steering Up (if so equipped) When the exit steering up feature is turned on, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit when the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

Main Menu Selection

The main menu selection menu allows the

user to customize the information that ap-

pears in the vehicle information display

when the ignition is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

Menu item Result

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio display on or off.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off.

Driver Assistance Allows user to turn the driver assistance display on or off.

Trip Computer Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off.

4WD (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4WD display on or off.

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Body Color

The body color menu allows the user to

select the color of vehicle that appears in

the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result

Body Color Displays the available colors for the vehicle in the vehicle information display.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to

set reminders for various vehicle mainte-

nance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. Many factors in-

cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving

habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement in-

dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that

long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pres-

sure checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which could

result in serious personal injury or

death.

Menu item Result

Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items

other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire

rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance

for service type items.

For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the dis-

tance for replacing tires.

Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items

other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire

rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Alarms

The alarms menu allows the user to set

various alerts.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.

Language

The language menu allows the user to

change the languages displayed in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display.

Unit

The unit menu allows the user to custom-

ize the information that appears in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display.

Tire Pressures (if so equipped) Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display.

Temperature Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Welcome Effect

The welcome effect menu allows the user

to control the welcome effect feature.

Menu item Result

Welcome Effect Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to

restore the vehicle information display set-

tings to factory status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-27

LIC4201

2-28 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. No Key Detected

2. Key ID Incorrect

3. Key low battery

4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

5. Key Registration Complete

6. Shift to Park

7. Push ignition to OFF

8. Push brake and start switch to drive

9. Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery is low)

10. Release Parking Brake

11. Low Fuel

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

14. Low Washer Fluid

15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

17. Intelligent 4x4 indicators (if so equipped)

18. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

19. Door Open

20. Liftgate Open

21. Timer Alert – Have a break?

22. Low Outside Temperature

23. Power will turn off to save the battery

24. Power turned off to save the battery

25. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

26. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

27. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual

28. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

29. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

30. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

31. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

32. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator

(if so equipped)

33. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

34. Transmission Shift Position indicator

35. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

36. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

37. Rear Door Alert is activated

38. Check Back Seat For All Articles

39. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

indicator

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. Make sure

the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is placed from the OFF position and

the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with

an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Key low battery

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-

tery with a new one. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, this light comes on for a period

of time and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of

a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem. If the light comes on while the engine

is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However,

in these cases, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is

registered to the vehicle.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition

switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the

shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,

a chime sounds when the ignition switch is

in the ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position and start the

engine.

Push ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illu-

minates, the warning will illuminate if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC position

when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-

nition switch in the ON position and then in

the LOCK position.

Push brake and start switch to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator also appears when the ve-

hicle has been started using the Remote

Engine Start (if so equipped) function.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine from any position of the ignition

switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of

the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-

telligent Key system and the vehicle are not

communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch

with the Intelligent Key while depressing

the brake pedal. For additional information,

refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-

charge” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message

area of the vehicle information display

when the parking brake is set and the ve-

hicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level

in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel

gauge reaches 0 (Empty). Therewillbea

small reserve of fuel in the tank when the

fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

2-30 Instruments and controls

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-

hicle has been refueled. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display if low oil

pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-

signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil

pressure warning is not designed to indi-

cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the

windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.

Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.

For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. The

warning appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-

sures of all four tires to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For additional

information, refer to “Low tire pressure

warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an er-

ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes

on, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Intelligent 4x4 indicators (if so

equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent 4x4

system status while the engine is running.

For additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent 4x4 (I-4x4)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the 4-wheel

drive system is not functioning properly.

For additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent 4x4 (I-4x4)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has

been opened.

Liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when the liftgate

has been opened.

Timer Alert — Have a break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to six

hours. For additional information, refer to

“Settings” in this section.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-

ture can be changed to display in Celsius or

Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-

fer to “Settings” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display after a period of time if the

ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON posi-

tion and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Push-button igni-

tion switch positions” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This message appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Push-button ig-

nition switch positions” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights

are left in the ON position when exiting the

vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the

OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and

RCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of

the following systems (if so equipped) is

not functioning properly:

∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable

because a radar blockage is detected. For

additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-

tem status.

When cruise control is activated, a green

circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The

vehicle information display will also display

the speed the cruise control was set at. If

you accelerate past the set speed, the

speed will blink until you either cancel

cruise control or go back to the set speed. If

cruise control is on and canceled, the

speed will be displayed to show the speed

the vehicle will return to if the resume but-

ton is activated.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is

shown by the color. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended

storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended

storage switch to turn off the warning. For

additional information, refer to “Extended

storage switch” in this section.

Transmission Shift Position indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift

position.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the CVT system. If this warn-

ing comes on, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system becomes un-

available because the front radar is ob-

structed. For additional information, refer

to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” or “Auto-

matic Emergency Braking ” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Rear Door Alert is activated

When the system is enabled, this message

appears when the Rear Door Alert system

is active and can remind the driver to check

the back seat.

∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver

can select “Dismiss Message” to clear

the display for a period of time. If no

selection is made, this message auto-

matically turns off after a period of time.

∙ Using the steering wheel switch, a driver

can select “Disable Alert” to disable the

horn alert for the remainder of the cur-

rent trip.

WARNING

Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a

stop within a trip temporarily dismisses

the message for that stop without turn-

ing the system off. Alerts can be pro-

vided for other stops during the trip. Se-

lecting “Disable Alert” turns off the Rear

Door Alert system for the remainder of

a trip and no audible alert will be

provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-

ables it using the vehicle information

display. For additional information, refer

to “How to use the vehicle information

display” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Rear

Door Alert” in this section.

Check Back Seat For All Articles

When the system is enabled, this message

appears when the vehicle comes to a com-

plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from

the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,

and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes-

sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,

to check for items in the rear seat after the

audible alert has been provided.

Instruments and controls 2-33

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en-

ables it using the vehicle information

display. For additional information, refer

to “How to use the vehicle information

display” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “Rear

Door Alert” in this section.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

indicator

This indicator shows when the AEB system

is engaged.

Your vehicle has two types of security sys-

tems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audible alarm signals if someone

opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the

system is armed. It is not, however, a mo-

tion detection type system that activates

when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-

tion occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and

always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer

such equipment. Check with your insur-

ance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection

features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if

so equipped). The system can be

armed even if the windows and

moonroof are open.

2. Remove the key from the vehicle.

LIC2930

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-34 Instruments and controls

3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock

all doors. The doors can be locked with

the key, door handle request switch (if

so equipped) or power door lock

switch.

4. Confirm that the

indicator light

comes on. The

indicator light

stays illuminated for a period of time

indicating that the system is in the pre-

armed phase.

The

indicator light will blink every

3 seconds once the security system is

armed.

If during the pre-armed phase one of

the following occurs, the system will

not arm:

∙ Any door is unlocked with the key or

door request switch (if so equipped).

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the

ACC or ON position.

∙ Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate when all the doors, hood and

trunk are locked with the ignition

switch placed in the LOCK position.

When placing the ignition switch in

the ACC or ON position, the system

will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after

a period of time. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again. The alarm can be shut off by

unlocking the driver’s door by pressing

the

button on the Intelligent Key

or placing the ignition switch in the ON

or ACC position.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ opening a door without using the Intel-

ligent Key (even if the door is unlocked

by using the inside lock knob or the

power door lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-

er’s door or the liftgate by pressing

the

button on the Intelligent Key or

pushing the request switch (if so equipped)

on the driver’s or passenger’s door with the

Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition reoccurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,

LOCK or ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all regis-

tered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

LIC0474

2-36 Instruments and controls

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. After

approximately 1 minute, turn the switch

on again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted by turning the

knob toward

䊊

(Slower) or

䊊

(Faster).

Also, the intermittent operation speed

varies in accordance with the vehicle

speed (if so equipped). (For example,

when the vehicle speed is high, the in-

termittent operation speed will be

faster.)

䊊

Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

LIC3028

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-37

Push the lever up

䊊

to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

䊊

to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

NOTE:

The Wiper with Speed feature may be

disabled. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

REAR SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the rear window

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove

the snow, etc. on and around the wiper

arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch

on again to operate the wiper.

LIC3101

2-38 Instruments and controls

The rear window wiper and washer oper-

ate when the ignition switch is in the ON

position. Turn the switch clockwise from

the OFF position to operate the wiper.

䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration (not adjustable)

䊊

Low (ON) — continuous low speed op-

eration

Push the switch forward

䊊

to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

To defrost the rear window glass and out-

side mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-

gine and push the rear window defroster

switch on. The rear window defroster indi-

cator light on the switch comes on. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on

the rear window are not part of the rear

window defroster system. These wires

make up the antenna for the audio sys-

tem.

LIC1388

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-39

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3240

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3237

Type C (if so equipped)

LIC4251

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-40 Instruments and controls

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights

to turn on and off automatically. The auto-

light system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,

tail, license plate and instrument panel

lights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition switch in the

OFF position and all doors are closed.

∙ Turn on the headlights if the windshield

wipers make multiple continuous

passes within approximately one min-

ute of the first pass (if so equipped). The

headlights remain on until the wipers

are turned off for a short period of time.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the

time delay for autolight shutoff can be

adjusted. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

∙ Place the headlight switch in the AUTO

position

䊊

∙ Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

∙ The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF

and a door is opened and left open, the

headlights remain ON for a period of time. If

another door is opened while the head-

lights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, place the

switch in the OFF,

,or position.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3188

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC4252

Instruments and controls 2-41

Be sure you do not put anything on top

of the autolight sensor located in the top

side of the instrument panel

䊊

. The au-

tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it

is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as

if it is dark out and the headlights will

illuminate. If this occurs while parked

with the engine off and the ignition

switch placed in the ON position, your

vehicle’s battery could become dis-

charged.

Headlight beam select

䊊

To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward while the low beams

are on. The high beam lights come on

and the

indicator light illumi-

nates.

䊊

Pull the lever back to return to the low

beam.

䊊

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams do not need to be on

for this to function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the

or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

NOTE:

The Battery Saver system may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in this

section.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC2237 LIC3250

2-42 Instruments and controls

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

(DRL) SYSTEM

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity when

the engine is started and the parking brake

is released. The LED Daytime Running

Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position. When you turn

the headlight switch to the

position

for full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-

nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the

parking brake is released. The LED DRL re-

main on until the ignition is placed in the

OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch on for interior controls and switches

to illuminate, as those remain off while the

switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button

䊊

to increase the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button

䊊

to decrease the

brightness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

LIC2389 LIC3252

Instruments and controls 2-43

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the head-

light switch to the

position, then ro-

tate the fog light switch to the

posi-

tion.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then rotate the fog light switch

to the

position.

To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

LIC3256

2-44 Instruments and controls

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the climate controlled seats if you or the

occupants can not monitor seat tem-

peratures or have an inability to feel

pain in those body parts in contact with

the seat. Use of the climate controlled

seats by such people could result in se-

rious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated while

the engine is not running.

∙ Do not use the climate control seat for

extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙

Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

objects. This may result in damage to

the climate controlled seat.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the seat should

be removed immediately with a dry

cloth

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not oper-

ate, turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seat by a built-in

heater or ventilates air into the seat. The

climate control switch is located on the

center console.

LIC2227 LIC4078

HORN CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT

SWITCHES (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-45

The climate controlled seat can be oper-

ated as follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob

䊊

to the heat

side

䊊

or the cool side

䊊

. The indica-

tor light

䊊

on the control knob will illu-

minate.

3. Adjust the desired intensity using the

control knob.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

or cooled, or before you leave the ve-

hicle, be sure to turn the control knob

to the OFF (center) position. The indica-

tor light

䊊

on the control knob goes off

with the switch in the OFF (center) po-

sition.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3037

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

2-46 Instruments and controls

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the

switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to push the

switch to turn it off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-47

The 2nd row seats are warmed by built-in

heaters. The switches are located on the

rear of the front center console and can be

operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the

switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the

switch off.

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

LIC3037 LIC0421

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

TYPE A (if so equipped)

2-48 Instruments and controls

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

68°F (20°C).

Press the CLIMATE button to access the

heated steering wheel key. Touch the

“Steering Heater” key

䊊

to warm the steer-

ing wheel after the engine starts. The indi-

cator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

Touch the key again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

key is touched, the system will not heat

the steering wheel. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

LIC4178

HEATED STEERING WHEEL TYPE B (if

so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-49

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator light and

the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

system warning light will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully when

using the hill descent control system

and decelerate the vehicle speed by

depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driv-

ing on frozen, muddy or extremely

steep downhill roads. Failure to con-

trol vehicle speed may result in a loss

of control of the vehicle and possible

serious injury or death.

LIC3344 LIC3435

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if

so equipped)

2-50 Instruments and controls

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system

operates continuously for a long time,

the temperature of the brake pads may

increase and the hill descent control

system may be temporarily disabled

(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-

cator light does not come on continu-

ously after blinking, stop using the

system.

The hill descent control system is designed

to reduce driver workload when going

down steep hills. The hill descent control

system helps to control vehicle speed so

the driver can concentrate on steering the

vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

∙ the 4WD switch must be in the LOCK

position and the vehicle speed must be

under 15 mph (25 km/h)

∙ the hill descent control system switch

must be ON.

The hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light will come on when the system is

activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illumi-

nate while the hill descent control system

applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light blinks if the switch is on and all

conditions for system activation are not

met or if the system becomes disengaged

for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system,

push the switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system ON indicator light” in

this section and “Hill descent control sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

WARNING

When this switch is activated the fol-

lowing Warning Systems (if so

equipped) are turned off and will not

work.

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the warning systems Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)) that are activated (if so equipped)

using the settings menu on the vehicle in-

formation display.

LSD2208

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-51

When the warning systems switch is

turned off, the indicator

䊊

on the switch is

off. The indicator will also be off if the warn-

ing system is deactivated using the set-

tings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the side indi-

cator light, located next to the outside mir-

rors, if the radar detects a vehicle in the

detection zone. If the turn signal is acti-

vated in the direction of the detected ve-

hicle, a chime sounds twice and the side

indicator light will flash. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space. If the

system detects an approaching vehicle

from either side, the system chimes (once)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-

ing from. For additional information, refer

to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

To use the outlets for devices that require

120v power, place the ignition in the ON

position and push the power inverter

switch.

The switch will illuminate when enabled.

CAUTION

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Do not attempt to use this while

driving.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory, doing

so could significantly drain the bat-

tery of your vehicle.

LIC2231

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

TOW mode should be used when pulling a

heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driv-

ing the vehicle in the TOW mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not

cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced, and the

transmission/engine driving characteris-

tics may feel unusual.

Push the TOW mode switch to activate

TOW mode. The indicator light on the in-

strument panel illuminates when TOW

mode is selected. Push the TOW mode

switch again to turn TOW mode OFF.

TOW mode is automatically canceled when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF po-

sition.

The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina-

tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub-

scription to call for assistance in case of an

emergency.

Pressing the button will (with a paid sub-

scription) reach a response specialist that

will provide assistance based on the situa-

tion described by the vehicle’s occupant. For

additional information, or to enroll your ve-

hicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect

or call 855–426–6628.

LIC3343 LIC3357

TOW MODE SWITCH E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

The Rear Door Alert system functions un-

der certain conditions to indicate there

may be an object or passenger in the rear

seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the

vehicle.

The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis-

abled. The driver can enable the system

using the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display warnings and indicators”

in this section.

When the system is enabled:

∙ The system is activated when a rear

door is opened and closed within

10 minutes of the vehicle being driven.

When the driver door is closed and the

system is activated, a visual message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to

“Rear Door Alert is activated” in this sec-

tion.

∙ If a rear door is opened and closed but

the vehicle is not driven within approxi-

mately 10 minutes, the system will not

be activated. A rear door must be

opened and closed and the car driven

within 10 minutes for the system to ac-

tivate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti-

vated:

∙ When the driver puts the vehicle in the P

(Park) position, a notification message

appears in the vehicle information dis-

play with the options to “Dismiss Mes-

sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired.

∙ Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily

disable for that stop.

∙ No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will

keep the alert enabled for that stop.

∙ If the alert is enabled when a driver exits

the vehicle, a message will appear in the

vehicle information display that states

“Check Back Seat For All Articles.”

If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected:

∙ An audible horn sound will occur af-

ter a short time unless a rear door is

opened and closed within a short

time to deactivate the alert.

∙ If the doors are locked before the

alert is deactivated by opening a rear

door, the horn will sound.

∙ If the trunk is opened before a rear

door is opened, the horn will be de-

layed until after the trunk is closed.

NOTE:

If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the

message alert will still be shown in the

vehicle information display but the horn

will not sound.

WARNING

∙ If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no

audible alert will be provided regard-

less of rear door open/close status.

∙ There may be times when there is an

object or passenger in the rear seat(s)

but the audible alert does not sound.

For example, this may occur if rear

seat passengers enter or exit the ve-

hicle during a trip.

∙ The system does not directly detect

objects or passengers in the rear

seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a

rear door is opened and closed, indi-

cating that there may be something in

the rear seat(s).

REAR DOOR ALERT

2-54 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

There may be times when the horn

sounds but there are no objects or pas-

sengers in the rear seat(s).

For additional information, refer to “Rear

Door Alert is activated” in this section.

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)

maximum.

The instrument panel and center console

power outlets are powered only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Instrument Panel

LIC3345

Center Console (if so equipped)

LIC3737

POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-55

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights, or rear

window defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

120V OUTLET (if so equipped)

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Do not use accessories that exceed a

120V, 150W power draw. Do not use

double adaptors or more than one

electrical accessory.

Cargo Area (if so equipped)

LIC2236

2nd Row

LIC2407

2-56 Instruments and controls

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

The extended storage switch is used when

the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is

located in the fuse panel to the left of the

steering wheel on the instrument panel. If

any electrical equipment does not operate,

ensure the extended storage switch is

pushed fully in place, as shown.

LDI2758

Pulled position

LIC3266

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-57

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS

Pushed position

LIC3268

LIC3546 LIC2392

STORAGE

2-58 Instruments and controls

SEATBACK POCKETS

There is one seatback pocket located on

the back of the driver and passenger seats.

The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd

row to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint or in the seatback pocket.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays

to help prevent injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

LIC2618

Front console

LIC3282

Instruments and controls 2-59

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key when locking or un-

locking the glove box.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed while driv-

ing to help prevent injury in an accident

or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the

lever

䊊

and raise the lid

䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock

latches.

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the

upper half of the console box.

The upper half of the console box may be

used for storage of cellular phones. An ac-

cess hole is provided at the front of the

upper half of the console box for a phone or

iPod® cord routing to the power outlet.

Rear armrest

LIC2214

LIC3003 LIC1026

2-60 Instruments and controls

Lower half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to

open the lower half of the console box. A

power outlet is located inside the console

box and there is storage for compact discs.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the

holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

LIC0702 LIC2312

Instruments and controls 2-61

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

Do not recline the rear seatback when

you use the cup holders on the rear

armrest. Doing so may cause the bever-

ages to spill over, and if they are hot,

they may scald the passengers.

Front console

LIC3486

Rear door

LIC2395

2nd row

LIC2212

2-62 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly in-

jure people during sudden braking or

an accident.

∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

3rd row

LIC2242

Bottle holder — front

LIC2393

Bottle holder — rear

LIC2394

Instruments and controls 2-63

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN

To access the floor storage area (Type A),

push down

䊊

to raise the handle, then pull

up on the handle to lift the luggage board.

To access the floor storage area (Type B),

raise the handle.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

When securing items using luggage hooks

located on the side finisher do not apply a

load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a

single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the

floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.

(490 N) to a single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2244

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3513

LIC3684

2-64 Instruments and controls

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-

cure cargo.

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous

to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

ROOF RACK

WARNING

∙ Always install the crossbars onto the

roof side rails before loading cargo of

any kind. Loading cargo directly onto

the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof

may cause vehicle damage.

∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly

distributed.

∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack

crossbars load capacity and always

distribute the load uniformly.

∙ Heavy loading of the crossbars has

the potential to affect the vehicle sta-

bility and handling during sudden or

unusual handling maneuvers.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle

is loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

crossbars.

CAUTION

∙ Use care when placing or removing

items from the roof rack. If you cannot

comfortably lift the items onto the

roof rack from the ground, use a lad-

der or a stool.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side

rails

䊊

. Crossbars

䊊

must be installed be-

fore applying load/cargo/luggage to the

roof of the vehicle.

LIC4202

Instruments and controls 2-65

Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may

be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

The service load capacity for the roof side

rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not ex-

ceed the crossbars load capacity.

Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-

ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR front and rear).

For additional information regarding GVWR

and GAWR, refer to:

∙ F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label

(located on the driver’s door pillar).

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side switch

5. Left rear passenger side switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

LIC3208

WINDOWS

2-66 Instruments and controls

Driver’s side power window

switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close all of the

windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the

detent and continue to hold down until the

desired window position is reached. To

close a window, pull the switch to the de-

tent and continue to hold up until the de-

sired window position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow.To open the window partially, push the

switch down

䊊

lightly until the desired

window position is reached. To close the

window partially, pull the switch up

䊊

until

the desired window position is reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down

䊊

. To close the window, pull the

switch up

䊊

LIC2309 LIC2663

Instruments and controls 2-67

Automatic operation (if so

equipped)

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, push the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

Auto-reverse function (if so

equipped)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when a window is closed by auto-

matic operation.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-

placed, or jump started, the power window

auto-reverse function may not operate

properly. If this occurs, please contact the

dealer to re-initialize the power window

auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something

caught in a window equipped with auto-

matic operation, as it is closing, the window

will be immediately lowered.

When power window switch does

not operate

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the power window system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

2. Open the window more than halfway

by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold

it to close the window, and then hold

the switch more than 3 seconds after

the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Op-

erate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete. The power window auto-

matically opens or closes depending

on if the automatic down or up func-

tion is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for

other windows.

If the power window function does not op-

erate properly after performing the above

procedure have the system checked and

repaired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC0410

2-68 Instruments and controls

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position. The

power moonroof is operational for a period

of time, even if the ignition switch is placed

in the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s

door or the front passenger’s door is

opened during this period of time, the

power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the open

䊊

or close

䊊

posi-

tion and release it; it need not be held. The

roof will automatically open or close all the

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once

more while it is opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the tilt up position

䊊

and release it; it need not be held. To tilt

down the moonroof, push the switch to the

tilt down position

䊊

Resetting the moonroof switch

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the moonroof operation system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch

forward until the moonroof stops.

3. Release the moonroof switch.

4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within

6 seconds.

5. The roof glass will tilt-down, slide-close,

slide-open, slide-close, tilt-up, tilt-

down.

6. Release the switch; initialization is

complete if the moonroof operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly

after performing the procedure above,

have your vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Auto-reverse function (when

closing or tilting down the

moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed or

tilted down by automatic operation when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition or for a period of time after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

LIC2313

DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-69

When closing

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it moves to the

front, the moonroof will immediately open

backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the

moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions

and repeats opening or tilting up the

moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down

switch within 5 seconds after it happens;

the moonroof will fully close gradually.

Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-

roof.

WARNING

∙ In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts and

child restraints.

∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

∙ Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it

forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Panoramic sunshade

The panoramic sunshade operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position. The

sunshade switch is located near the roof

console. When opening or closing the sun-

shade the switch need not be held.

To open the sunshade:

∙ To fully open the sunshade, push the

switch

䊊

toward the open position.

To close the sunshade:

∙ To fully close the sunshade, push the

switch

䊊

toward the close position.

LIC2228

2-70 Instruments and controls

WARNING

∙ To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from

the sunshade arm, the arm rail and

sunshade inlet port.

∙ Do not allow children near the rear

sunshade system. They could be

injured.

∙ Do not place objects on or near the

rear sunshade. This could cause im-

proper operation or damage it.

∙ Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.

This could cause improper operation

or damage it.

CAUTION

∙ Do not place objects (such as newspa-

pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-

shade inlet port. Doing so may en-

tangle these objects in the sunshade

when it is extending or retracting,

causing improper operation or dam-

age to the sunshade.

∙ Do not push the sunshade arm with

your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

∙ Do not put any object into the sun-

shade inlet port as this may result in

improper operation or damage the

sunshade.

∙ Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper opera-

tion or damage the sunshade.

∙ Do not forcefully pull the sunshade.

Doing so may elongate the sunshade.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

Restarting the sunshade switch

If the sunshade does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the sunshade operation system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or

ON position.

2. Push and hold the sunshade close

switch.

3. Sunshade will begin moving towards

the close position only while the switch

is continually held. (this disables the ob-

stacle detection).

4. Sunshade will stop for about 4 sec-

onds.

5. Sunshade drive cable will travel in the

open direction for .394 in. (10 mm) then

reverse direction and stop at the nor-

mal close position.

6. Release the sunshade close switch. Ini-

tialization procedure is complete.

If the moonroof does not operate properly

after performing the procedure above,

have your vehicle serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Auto-reverse function (when closing

the sunshade)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the sunshade is closed by au-

tomatic operation when the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position or for a period

of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the sunshade occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-71

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

of the passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the sunshade.

When the ON switch

䊊

is pressed, the foot-

well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so

equipped), map lights and rear personal

lights will automatically turn on and stay on

for a period of time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the Intelli-

gent Key or the request switch (if so

equipped) while all doors are closed

and the ignition switch is in the OFF

position.

∙ When individually pushed.

When the OFF switch

䊊

is pushed, the in-

terior lights do not illuminate.

NOTE:

The footwell lights (if so equipped) and

step lights (if so equipped) illuminate

when the driver and passenger doors

are open regardless of the interior light

switch position. These lights will turn off

automatically after a period of time

while doors are open to prevent the bat-

tery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

LIC2302

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-72 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be ad-

justed with the illumination brightness

control.

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on.

To turn them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the personal lights, push and

release the switch

䊊

To turn off the personal lights, push and

release the switch

䊊

LIC2303 LIC2304 LIC1413

Instruments and controls 2-73

CARGO LIGHT

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a

three-position switch. To operate, push the

switch to the desired position.

䊊

ON: The light is illuminated.

䊊

DOOR: The light illuminates when the

liftgate is opened. The light turns off

when the liftgate is closed.

䊊

OFF: The light does not illuminate re-

gardless of liftgate position or lock sta-

tus.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

SIC2063A

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-74 Instruments and controls

WARNING

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. For

additional information, refer to

“Push-button ignition switch” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual. Do not breathe exhaust

gases; they contain colorless and

odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon

monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener which cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

∙ During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc., that you are programming.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position (without starting the engine)

when programming HomeLink®. It is also

recommended that a new battery be

placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the radio

frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from

the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light

䊊

in view.

LIC2365

Instruments and controls 2-75

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and hand-held transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light

䊊

flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted

in “Programming HomeLink® for gate

openers” in this section.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the in-

dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light

䊊

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should

activate when the HomeLink® button

is pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light

䊊

blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-

vice. A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your

vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, lo-

cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually lo-

cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If

there is difficulty locating the button,

reference the garage door opener’s

manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have ap-

proximately 30 seconds to initiate the

next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® but-

ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat

the “press/hold/release” sequence up

to three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

LIC2366

2-76 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this

section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During training, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button

while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every

2 seconds until the frequency signal

has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training. DO NOT release un-

til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. The rapid flashing in-

dicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember

to plug it back in when programming is

completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, sim-

ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

∙ replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

∙ position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

∙ press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

Instruments and controls 2-77

∙ position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.

If HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position – keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pressing

the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink® but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

2-78 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Instruments and controls 2-79

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys..........................................3-4

Doors ...........................................3-5

Locking with key..............................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch .........3-6

Automatic door locks.........................3-7

Child safety rear door lock ....................3-7

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® .......................3-7

Operating range..............................3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution ..............3-10

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...........3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry

function .....................................3-13

Type A (if so equipped).......................3-14

Type B (if so equipped).......................3-14

Type C (if so equipped).......................3-15

Warning signals ............................. 3-17

Troubleshooting guide ......................3-18

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-20

Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-20

Remote starting the vehicle .................3-21

Extending engine run time ..................3-21

Canceling a Remote Engine Start............3-21

Conditions the Remote Engine Start will

notwork ....................................3-22

Hood ...........................................3-23

Liftgate.........................................3-23

Operating the manual liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-24

Operating the power liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-24

Motion-Activated Liftgate

(if so equipped) ..............................3-27

Liftgate release..............................3-28

Liftgate position setting

(if so equipped) ..............................3-29

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-30

Opening the fuel-filler door ..................3-30

Fuel-filler cap ................................3-30

Steering wheel .................................3-33

Manual operation (if so equipped) ...........3-33

Automatic

operation (if so equipped) ........3-33

Sun visors ......................................3-34

Vanity mirrors ...............................3-35

Card holder .................................3-35

Mirrors .........................................3-36

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-36

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-36

Outside mirrors .............................3-37

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-39

Memory storage function ...................3-39

Entry/exit function ..........................3-40

Setting memory function....................3-41

System operation ...........................3-41

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The

new keys must be registered by a NISSAN

dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key

system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System of your vehicle. Since the registra-

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2842

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2844

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2941

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

tion process requires erasing all memory in

the Intelligent Key components when reg-

istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-

gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-

cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the driver’s door and glove box.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”

in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep

the mechanical key with you to protect

your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being

opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechani-

cal key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet

and keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Stor-

age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

master or valet keys which are registered

to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

components in your vehicle. These keys

have a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the

locks.

To protect your belongings when you leave

a key with someone, give them the Intelli-

gent Key only, not the mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-

isting key can be duplicated without know-

ing the key number. As many as four

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should

bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer for registration. This is because the

registration process will erase the memory

of all key codes previously registered into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-

ter the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra-

tion will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the front doors cannot

be opened using the outside door handles,

and the back doors cannot be opened us-

ing the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock the door using the mechanical key,

turn the key toward the front of the vehicle

䊊

. This will only lock the corresponding

door and will not activate the security sys-

tem. To arm the security system, press

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

To unlock the corresponding door using

the mechanical key, turn the key toward

the rear of the vehicle. This will only unlock

the corresponding door and will not dis-

arm the security system.

䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2129

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position

䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

For front doors, the door can also be un-

locked by pulling on the inside handle lever

one time

䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the lock position

䊊

. When

locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-

senger’s side) to the unlock position

䊊

Inside lock

LPD2641

LPD2309

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position and any door is open, all

doors will lock. With the Intelligent Key left in

the vehicle and any door open, all doors will

unlock automatically and a chime will

sound after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

∙ All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park)

position or when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position,

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate

the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door

locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch (if so equipped)

on the vehicle without taking the key out

from a pocket or purse. The operating en-

vironment and/or conditions may affect

the Intelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key.

LPD2374

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-

ing with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak

radio waves. Environmental conditions

may interfere with the operation of the In-

telligent Key under the following operating

conditions:

∙ When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

∙ When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, or a CB radio.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

∙ When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-

ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. If

the battery is discharged, replace it with a

new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the

NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so

equipped) will blink green for about 30 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and per-

sonal computer, the battery life may be-

come shorter.

When the battery is discharged, firmly ap-

ply the foot brake and touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push

the ignition switch while depressing the

brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sound. For additional information,

refer to “Push-button ignition switch” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

For additional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch (if so equipped)

䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key operating range becomes narrower,

and the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch (if so equipped)

䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches (if so equipped) may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelli-

gent Key, to push the request switch (if so

equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2929

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

∙ Do not push the door handle request

switch (if so equipped) with the Intelli-

gent Key held in your hand as illustrated.

The close distance to the door handle

will cause the Intelligent Key system to

have difficulty recognizing that the In-

telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

∙ After locking with the door handle re-

quest switch (if so equipped), verify the

doors are securely locked by testing

them.

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you and

then lock the doors.

∙ Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch (if so equipped). The door will be

unlocked but will not open. Release the

door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket

or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch (if so

equipped) within the range of operation.

LPD2554 LPD2905

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position and make sure you carry

the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch (if

so equipped) while carrying the Intelli-

gent Key with you.

4. All doors will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice

and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

∙ Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch (if so equipped) while

the ignition switch is not in the LOCK

position.

∙ Doors lock by pushing the driver’s

side door handle request switch while

any door is open. However, the corre-

sponding door locks with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

∙ Request switches (if so equipped) for

all doors can be deactivated when the

I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to

OFF using the “Vehicle Settings”

menu in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

∙ Doors do not lock with the door

handle request switch (if so

equipped) with the Intelligent Key in-

side the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle, doors

can be locked with another Intelligent

Key.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles. Failure to follow these

instructions may result in inadvertently

unlocking the doors, which may de-

crease the safety and security of your

vehicle.

LPD2943 LPD2614

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION

∙ When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch (if so equipped), make

sure to have the Intelligent Key in your

possession before operating the re-

quest switch (if so equipped) to pre-

vent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

∙ The request switch (if so equipped) is

operational only when the Intelligent

Key has been detected by the Intelli-

gent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the

doors are locked, and then the Intelligent

Key is put inside the vehicle and all the

doors are closed; the lock will automati-

cally unlock and a beep will sound to warn

you.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is op-

erating the request switch (if so

equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel-

ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your

other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func-

tion under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch (if

so equipped) or power liftgate request

switch.

3. The hazard indicator lights flash once

and the outside chime sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch (if

so equipped) again within 1 minute to

unlock all doors.

LPD2943

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and lift-

gate can be deactivated when the I-Key

Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in

the “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle in-

formation display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking

the doors, that door may not be unlocked.

Returning the door handle to its original

position will unlock the door. If the door

does not unlock after returning the door

handle, push the door handle request

switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within 1 minute after pushing the

request switch (if so equipped).

∙ Opening any door.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-

riod of time when a door is unlocked and

the room light switch is in the DOOR posi-

tion.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting by performing one of the following

operations:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-

trol.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the

OFF position in “Vehicle Settings” of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate all door locks using the remote key-

less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-

mote keyless function can operate at a

distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-

hicle. The operating distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not

function under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

∙ When the doors or the rear liftgate are

open or not closed securely.

∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

LPD2614

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

TYPE A (if so equipped)

1. (lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

TYPE B (if so equipped)

1. (remote engine start)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

LPD3600 LPD3602

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TYPE C (if so equipped)

1. (remote engine start)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(liftgate) button

(panic) button

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the

button on the Intelli-

gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice

and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WARNING

After locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure that the doors have

been securely locked by operating the

door handles. Failure to follow these in-

structions may result in inadvertently

unlocking the doors, which may de-

crease the safety and security of your

vehicle.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key to unlock the driver’s door.

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once

and the driver’s door unlocks.

3. Press the

button again within

60 seconds to unlock all doors.

NOTE:

The Selective Unlock feature can be

changed using the “Vehicle Settings”

menu on the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within 1 minute after pressing

the

button:

∙ Opening any doors.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the inte-

rior light switch is in the ON position.

The light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following opera-

tions:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent

Key.

∙ Switching the interior light switch to the

OFF position.

LPD3026

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature

to the OFF position using the “Vehicle

Settings” menu on the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

lights” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-

ously open windows equipped with auto-

matic operation.

To open the windows, press the

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so

equipped)

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed

by performing the following:

∙ Press the

button for longer than

1 second to open the rear liftgate.

∙ Press the

button again for longer

than 1 second to close the rear liftgate.

When the

button is pressed during

the open or close process the liftgate will

stop. When pressed again, the liftgate will

reverse and go in the opposite direction.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the

button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time, or

∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.

∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-

senger door is pushed and the Intelli-

gent Key is in range of the door handle.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

lights flash twice. When the

button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights

nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you change the Answer Back Horn fea-

ture with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle

information display screen will show the

current mode after the ignition switch

has been cycled from the OFF to the ON

position. The vehicle information display

screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle settings” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To deactivate:

Press and hold the

and but-

tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard

indicator lights will flash three times to con-

firm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate:

Press and hold the

and but-

tons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

Intelligent Key button operation

light

The light blinks only when you press any

button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-

mination only signifies that the key fob has

transmitted a signal. You may look and/or

listen to verify that the vehicle has per-

formed the intended operation. The num-

ber of blinks identifies each registered key

(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for

your own identification purposes.

If the light does not blink, your battery may

be too weak to communicate to the ve-

hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to

be replaced. For additional information re-

garding the replacement of a battery, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the

vehicle from being stolen, a chime or

buzzer sounds from inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning is displayed in the

instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning

is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2836

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that

are programmed for the vehicle. If another

Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-

hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-

ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P

(Park) position

The Push ignition to OFF warning ap-

pears in the display.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get

out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on

the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears

on the display, the outside chime

sounds three times and the inside

warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The Rear Door Alert warning message

appears on the display, the horn

sounds three times twice, or a “Check

Back Seat for all Articles” warning ap-

pears on the display.

The Rear Door Alert is activated.

Check the back seat for all articles,

press the ENTER button to clear the

Rear Door Alert warning message.

The Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the outside chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-

tion and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When closing the door with the inside

lock knob in the lock position

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds and all the doors

unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch or the

button on

the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine

The Key low battery warning appears

on the display.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

For additional information, refer to

“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The No Key Detected warning appears

on the display, the outside chime

sounds three times and the inside

warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch

The I-Key System Error warning mes-

sage in the vehicle information display

appears.

It warns of a malfunction with the In-

telligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The button will be on the NISSAN In-

telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-

gine Start. This feature allows the engine to

start from outside the vehicle.

The following feature may be affected

when Remote Engine Start is used:

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate

control system will default to either a

heating or cooling mode depending on

outside and cabin temperatures. For

additional information, refer to “Remote

Engine Start with Intelligent Climate

Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems”

section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may re-

strict the use of remote starters. For ex-

ample, some laws require a person using

Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in

view. Check local regulations for any re-

quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of

the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Conditions the

Remote Engine Start will not work” in this

section.

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your ve-

hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to cause a

significant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intel-

ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only

be used when the Intelligent Key is within

the specified operating range from the ve-

hicle.

LPD2995

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start operating range

is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve-

hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature

perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the

button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold

the

button until the turn signal

lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If

the vehicle is not within view press and

hold the

button for at least 2 sec-

onds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

∙

The parking lights will turn on and remain

on as long as the engine is running.

∙ The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for

10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend

the time for an additional 10 minutes.

For additional information, refer to “Ex-

tending engine run time” in this section.

Press and hold the brake pedal while

switching the ignition to the ON position

before driving. For additional information,

refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The Remote Engine Start feature can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”

in this section. Run time will be calculated

as follows:

∙ The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function

is performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-

diately when the Remote Engine Start

function is performed again. For ex-

ample, if the engine has been running

for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are

added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will bring you

to the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,

or a single Remote Engine Start with an

extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled

to the ON position and then back to the

OFF position before the Remote Engine

Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform

one of the following:

∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and press

until the parking lights

turn off.

∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then

off.

∙ The extended engine run time has ex-

pired.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

∙ Opening the engine hood.

∙ Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch without the

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

∙ Not pressing the brake pedal while

pressing the ignition switch with the In-

telligent Key in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if

any of the following conditions are present:

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.

∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.

∙ The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from

running to off. This is not applicable

when extending engine run time.

∙ The

button is not pressed and

held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The

button is not pressed and

held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

∙ The brake is pressed.

∙ The doors are not closed and locked.

∙ The liftgate (if so equipped) or trunk (if

so equipped) is open.

∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid

in the vehicle information display.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single

Remote Engine Start with an extension,

have already been used.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).

∙ There is a detected registered key al-

ready inside of the vehicle.

∙ The Remote Engine Start feature has

been switched to OFF using the “Vehicle

Settings” menu on the “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

䊊

located below the driver side instru-

ment panel. The hood will spring up

slightly.

2. Push the lever

䊊

at the front of the

hood to the side as illustrated with your

fingertips

3. Raise the hood

䊊

4. Remove the support rod and insert

into the slot

䊊

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and

make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

∙ Always be sure that hands and feet

are clear of the door frame to avoid

injury while closing the liftgate.

LPD3064

HOOD LIFTGATE

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

OPERATING THE MANUAL

LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors including the lift-

gate simultaneously.

To open the liftgate, push the liftgate

opener switch

䊊

and pull up on the

handle.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down

securely.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

(if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the liftgate.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power lift-

gate, the shift lever must be in P (Park).

Also, the power liftgate will not operate if

battery voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves

from the fully closed position to the fully

open position in approximately5–8sec-

onds. The power open feature can be acti-

vated by the switch on the key fob, the instru-

ment panel switch or the liftgate open

switch. A chime sounds to indicate the

power open sequence has been started.

LPD2274 LPD2108

Liftgate Instrument Panel Switch

LPD2212

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate

can be opened by the instrument panel

switch, key fob or liftgate opener switch

䊊

(with key fob in liftgate range). The

liftgate will individually unlock and open.

Once the liftgate is closed, the vehicle

will remain in the unlock status.

∙ The key fob button must be held for

1 second before the liftgate opens.

∙ The liftgate must be unlocked to open it

with the liftgate opener switch

䊊

and

without key fob in liftgate range.

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever

is moved out of P (Park) and the vehicle is

beginning to move, during a power open

operation.

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves

from the fully open position to the second-

ary position. When the liftgate reaches the

secondary position, the cinching motor en-

gages and pulls the liftgate to its primary

latch position. Power close takes approxi-

mately7–10seconds. The power close

feature can be activated by the switch on

the key fob, the instrument panel or the

liftgate switch

䊊

. A chime sounds to indi-

cate the power close sequence has been

started.

Liftgate opener switch

LPD2109

LPD2275

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

∙ If the liftgate opener switch

䊊

is acti-

vated while the cinching motor is en-

gaged, the cinching motor will disen-

gage, and the liftgate will enter the

power open function initiated by the lift-

gate opener switch.

∙ The key fob button must be held for

1 second before the liftgate closes.

Stop - Reverse:

During an open/close movement, the lift-

gate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key,

instrument panel or liftgate switch (

䊊

) is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed

if the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or

liftgate switch (

䊊

) is pressed again.

Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power

open or power close, a warning chime will

sound and the liftgate will reverse direction

and return to the full open or full close po-

sition. If a second obstacle is detected, the

liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will

enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of

the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a

pinch strip during power close, the liftgate

will reverse direction and return to the full

open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not oper-

ate.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

liftgate.

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the lift-

gate may be operated manually. Power op-

eration may not be available if multiple ob-

stacles have been detected in a single

power cycle, or if battery voltage is low.

If the power liftgate opener switch

䊊

pushed during power open or close, the

power operation will be canceled and the

liftgate can be operated manually.

To open the liftgate manually, push the lift-

gate opener switch

䊊

and lift the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down

securely.

LPD2274

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if

so equipped)

The liftgate can be operated using a quick

kicking motion under the center of the rear

bumper.

To operate, the Intelligent Key must be

within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate.

Proper operation technique

∙ While at the rear of the vehicle, begin

making a quick forward kicking motion.

∙ Raise your foot straight under the cen-

ter of the rear bumper then immedi-

ately return your foot to the ground in a

continuous motion.

∙ The kicking motion should be straight,

smooth and consistent.

∙ After your kick motion is complete, step

back and allow the liftgate to

open/close.

∙ Three beeps will sound and the liftgate

will begin moving within two seconds

after the kick.

CAUTION

Before performing the kicking motion,

steady your stance to prevent any loss

of balance. Also, while making the kick-

ing motion, take caution around hot ex-

haust system parts. Otherwise, there

may be danger of injury.

Activation zone

LPD2768

DO: Quick forward kick and return while

the key fob is within range

LPD2873

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

WARNING

Prevent unintentional liftgate

opening/closing. There may be condi-

tions when opening/closing the liftgate

is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key

out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or

80 cm), when washing or working

around the back of the vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Interference or malfunction can be

caused by parking in close proximity

to radio or satellite towers.

∙ Intelligent Key interference could be

caused if you have your key fob stored

next to your cell phone or any RF-

enabled smart card. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent

Key®” in this section.

LIFTGATE RELEASE

WARNING

∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

∙ To avoid personal injury, do not at-

tempt to activate the power liftgate if

one or both of the liftgate struts are

removed.

CAUTION

∙ If the power liftgate does not stay

open or if the liftgate unexpectedly

closes at any time while a continuous

warning chime sounds, do not oper-

ate the liftgate. There may be a pres-

sure loss in one or both of the liftgate

struts. It is recommended that you

have the liftgate inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Do not activate the power liftgate if

one or both of the liftgate struts are

removed. Damage to the liftgate or

power liftgate mechanisms may

occur.

DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause

during kick

LPD2764

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual liftgate release (if so

equipped)

If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked

with the door lock switch or the Intelligent

Key due to a discharged battery, follow

these steps:

1. Remove the cover

䊊

on the inside of

the liftgate.

2. Move the lever

䊊

as illustrated to open

the liftgate.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for repair.

Power liftgate release (if so

equipped)

If the liftgate cannot be opened with the

instrument panel switch, liftgate opener

switch or key fob due to a discharged bat-

tery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover

䊊

on the inside of

the liftgate.

2. Move the lever

䊊

as illustrated to open

the liftgate.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for repair.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so

equipped)

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific

height by performing the following:

1. Open the liftgate using the request

switch or the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired

position and hold the liftgate (the lift-

gate will have some resistance when

being manually adjusted).

LPD2646 SPA2778 LPD3012

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

3. While holding the liftgate in position,

push and hold the liftgate switch

located on the liftgate for approxi-

mately 5 seconds or until two beeps

are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected posi-

tion setting. To change the position of the

liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the po-

sition of the liftgate.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, push the right

side of the fuel-filler door to release.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

LPD2110

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message

will be displayed/warning will appear

if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be displayed.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly after the Loose Fuel Cap

warning message is

displayed/warning appears may

cause the

Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the

light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The

light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the

light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-

filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be dis-

played. To turn off the warning, perform the

following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this

section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the

button on the steering

wheel for about 1 second to turn off the

Loose Fuel Cap warning after tighten-

ing the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2621 LPD3029

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates. Al-

ways sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever

䊊

down:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction

䊊

to the desired position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction

䊊

to the desired

position.

Push the lock lever

䊊

up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the

switch

䊊

in the following directions:

∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction

䊊

to the desired tilt position.

∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or

backward in direction

䊊

to the desired

telescopic position.

LPD2111 LPD2410

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-

scoping functions of the steering

wheel, after the vehicle’s battery has

been discharged, may prevent the

steering wheel position from being

adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Both the tilt and telescopic steering

operation must be reset after the vehicle’s

battery has been discharged in order to

prevent the tilt and telescopic operation

from locking in one position. When the bat-

tery has been recharged or replaced, per-

form the following:

∙ For tilt operation, adjust the switch

䊊

so the steering wheel moves to the

highest position

䊊

that can be

reached.

∙ For telescopic operation, adjust the

switch

䊊

so the steering wheel moves

to the most forward and backward po-

sition

䊊

that can be reached.

Performing these operations resets the

range of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-

scopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so

equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system (if

so equipped) will make the steering wheel

move up automatically when the driver’s

door is opened and the ignition switch is in

the LOCK position. This lets the driver get

into and out of the seat more easily. The

steering wheel moves back into position

when the driver’s door is closed and the

ignition switch is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in this section.

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor

䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing the visor to the side

䊊

LPD2154

SUN VISORS

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out

as needed

䊊

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

Some vanity mirrors are illuminated (if so

equipped) and turn on when the mirror

cover is open.

CARD HOLDER

To access the card holder located on the

ceiling, pull the driver’s side sun visor down

and slide the card into the card holder

䊊

Do not view information while operating

the vehicle.

LPD2067

Driver’s side

LPD2644

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position

䊊

to reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

at night.

Use the day position

䊊

when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically dims during night time condi-

tions and according to the intensity of the

headlights of the vehicle following you. The

automatic anti-glare feature is activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

The indicator light

䊊

will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors

䊊

or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

Type A and Type B (if so equipped)

The indicator light

䊊

will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,

press:

∙ The O button for inside mirrors with-

out compass.

∙ The

button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn off.

WPD0126

Type A - Without compass (if so

equipped)

LPD0469

MIRRORS

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature

again, press:

∙ The | button for inside mirrors with-

out compass.

∙ The

button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information on HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) op-

eration, refer to “HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

For additional information on the compass

display

䊊

(if so equipped), refer to “Com-

pass display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch

䊊

to select the left

or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the

desired position using the large switch

䊊

Move the small switch

䊊

to the center

(neutral) position to prevent accidentally

moving the mirror.

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2660

LPD2452

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to

defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both

outside mirror surfaces downward to pro-

vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle

when the mirror control switch is in either

the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their

original position when you shift out of R

(Reverse).

The outside mirror surfaces will return to

their original position when one of the fol-

lowing conditions has occurred:

∙ The shift lever is moved to any position

other than R (Reverse).

∙ The outside mirror control switch is set

to the neutral or center position.

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

LPD2112

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in

the center position, the mirror surface

will NOT turn downward when the shift

lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic drive positioner” in this section.

The automatic drive positioner system has

two features:

∙ Memory storage function

∙ Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, outside

mirrors and steering wheel (if so equipped)

can be stored in the automatic drive posi-

tioner memory. Follow these procedures to

use the memory system.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be stopped while set-

ting the memory.

LPD2508

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, outside mirrors

and steering wheel (if so equipped) to

the desired positions by manually oper-

ating each adjusting switch. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Seats” in the

“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this

manual and “Outside mirrors” in this

section.

2. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-

onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on and stay

on for approximately 5 seconds.

The chime will sound when the memory is

stored.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous

memory position will be overwritten by

the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

∙ Push the SET switch.

∙ If a memory position has been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light

for the respective switch will stay on for

approximately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored

memory position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored

memory position (memory switch 1 or 2)

with the following procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-2 in the “Memory storage

function” section for storing the

memory position.

2. While the indicator light is on, press

the

button on the key fob. The

hazard lights will flash twice. The indi-

cator light of the linked memory switch

will blink and click twice. After the indi-

cator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

in the OFF position, pressing the

but-

ton on the key fob will move the driver’s

seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to

the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob

will link the new position and overwrites

the previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s

seat, steering column and steering wheel

(if so equipped) will automatically move

when the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-

tion. This allows the driver to easily get in

and out of the driver’s seat.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and

the steering column will move up:

∙ When the ignition is switched to OFF

and the driver’s door is opened.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will

return to the previous position:

∙ When the ignition is switched to ON.

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The entry/exit function can be enabled or

disabled through “Vehicle Settings” in the

vehicle information display by performing

the following:

∙ Switch the Exit Seat Slide from on to off.

∙ Switch the Exit Steering UP from on to

off.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the stored memory positions

will be lost and some of the functions will

be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

2. Open and close the driver’s door more

than two times with the ignition switch

in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now work

properly.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The position of the following settings can

be linked to the Intelligent Key and the

memorized settings can be available for

each Intelligent Key.

∙ Climate control system

∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)

∙ Audio system

To use the memory function, set the cli-

mate, navigation and audio systems to the

driver’s preferred settings. Lock the doors

with the Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key

may be set with the driver’s individual pref-

erences. When a new Intelligent Key is used,

“Connection with the key has been done”

will be displayed on the screen and the

memorized settings are available.

To engage the memorized settings, per-

form the following:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to

the memorized settings.

2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driv-

er’s door handle request switch or

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

3. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” po-

sition. The settings linked to the Intelli-

gent Key will start.

For additional information, refer to “Heater

and air conditioner (automatic)” in the

“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section of this

manual.

For additional information on using the

navigation system (if so equipped), refer to

the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

∙ When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph

(7 km/h).

∙ When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive posi-

tioner is operating.

∙ When the switch for the driver’s seat

and steering column is pushed while

the automatic drive positioner is oper-

ating.

∙ When the seat has already been moved

to the memorized position.

∙ When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

∙ When the shift lever is moved from P

(Park) to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual ................4-2

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...............4-3

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-4

How to read the displayed lines...............4-5

Difference between predicted and

actual distances..............................4-5

How to park with predicted course

lines ..........................................4-7

Adjusting the screen .........................4-9

How to turn on and off predicted

course lines ..................................4-9

RearView Monitor system limitations .........4-9

System maintenance........................4-10

Intelligent Around View Monitor

(if so equipped) ..................................4-11

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

operation....................................4-12

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-16

How to park with predicted course

lines .........................................4-17

How to switch the display ...................4-19

Adjusting the screen ........................4-19

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

limitations...................................4-20

System maintenance........................4-22

Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor)

(if so equipped) .................................4-23

Sonar system operation.....................4-23

Turning on and off the sonar function .......4-24

Sonar system limitations ....................4-25

System maintenance........................4-26

Moving Object Detection (MOD)

(if so equipped) .................................4-27

MOD system operation ......................4-28

Turning MOD on and off .....................4-30

MOD system limitations .....................4-30

System maintenance........................4-31

Vents...........................................4-32

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) .........4-33

Automatic operation ........................4-34

Manual operation ...........................4-35

Operating tips ...............................4-37

Rear automatic air conditioning system .....4-38

Ser

vicing air conditioner........................4-41

USB/iPod® charging ports ......................4-41

Antenna........................................4-42

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-42

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual that includes the following infor-

mation.

∙ NissanConnect® Services (if so

equipped)

∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)

∙ Audio system

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system

∙ Viewing information

∙ Other settings

∙ Voice recognition

∙ General system information

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S

MANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4815

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. When activating the RearView

Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the

messages may not be displayed immedi-

ately. The radio can still be heard while the

RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just

above the vehicle’s license plate

䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

When activating the RearView Monitor, the

guide lines, the icons and the messages

may not be displayed immediately.

LHA3757

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line

䊊

are dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line

䊊

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line

䊊

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line

䊊

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

Predicted course lines

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when back-

ing up. The predicted course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. When activating

the RearView Monitor, the guide lines, the

icons and the messages may not be dis-

played immediately. The predicted course

lines will move depending on how much

the steering wheel is turned and will not be

displayed while the steering wheel is in the

straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predicted course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

LHA4805

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines

䊊

do not touch

the object in the display. However, the ve-

hicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

LHA5002 LHA5003 LHA4995

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the

position

䊊

in the display. However, the po-

sition

䊊

is actually at the same distance as

the position

䊊

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

䊊

when the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

When activating the RearView Monitor,

LHA5004 LHA5043

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

the guide lines, the icons and the mes-

sages may not be displayed immedi-

ately.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines

䊊

enter the park-

ing space

䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel

to the parking space

䊊

while referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

LHA4770

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,

Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and Color of the

RearView Monitor, press the SETTING but-

ton with the RearView Monitor on. Select

one of the items and change the value by

touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the

multi-function controller.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast,

Black Level, Tint, and Color of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make

sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

To toggle on and off the predicted course

lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Camera” or “Camera/Sonar”

key.

3. Touch the “Camera” key.

4. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key

to turn the feature on or off.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

LHA4243

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the cam-

era.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera

䊊

, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3757

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button or CAMERA

but-

ton

LHA4816

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for the proper use of the

Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is

a convenience feature and is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where ob-

jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-

ners of the vehicle in particular, are

areas where objects do not always

appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear

views. Always check your surround-

ings to be sure that it is safe to move

before operating the vehicle. Always

operate the vehicle slowly.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel

parking.

The monitor displays various views of the

position of the vehicle in a split screen for-

mat. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

∙ Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

∙ Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

∙ Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle

from above.

∙ Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent

Around View Monitor system uses cam-

eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-

cle’s outside mirrors and one just above

the vehicle’s license plate

䊊

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition or press the CAMERA or

CAMERA

button to operate the Intelli-

gent Around View Monitor. When activating

LHA3759

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the Intelligent Around View Monitor, the

icons and the messages may not be dis-

played immediately.

When the camera is first activated with the

bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so

equipped) will flash on the screen. This in-

dicates that the sonar system is activated.

For additional information on the rear so-

nar system, refer to “Rear Sonar System

(RSS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

The screen displayed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor will automatically re-

turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after

the CAMERA or CAMERA

button has

been pressed with the shift lever in a posi-

tion other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent

distance viewed on the monitor may

be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-

fected by the number of occupants,

cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road

condition and road grade.

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are fur-

ther than they appear. When driving

the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed

in the monitor are closer than they

appear.

∙ Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course lines and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ The vehicle width and predicted

course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

∙ The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right, because the

rearview camera is not installed in the

rear center of the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

vehicle width and distance to objects with

reference to the vehicle body line

䊊

are

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

∙ Red line

䊊

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line

䊊

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line

䊊

: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line

䊊

: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

(if so equipped)

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width

when backing up.

Predicted course lines

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when oper-

ating the vehicle. The predicted course

lines will be displayed on the monitor when

the steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and

might not be displayed while the steering

wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when

the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns about

90 degrees or less from the straight-

ahead position, both the right and left

predicted course lines

䊊

are displayed.

When the steering wheel turns about 90

degrees or more, a line is displayed only

on the opposite side of the turn.

Front view

SAA1840

Rear view

LHA4992

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the

vehicle position and the predicted course

to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

䊊

shows the position of

the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-

tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-

eye view may differ somewhat from the

actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

䊊

are indicated in black.

After the ignition switched is placed in the

ON position, the non-viewable area

䊊

highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the

birds-eye view is displayed.

In addition, the non-viewable corners are

displayed in red and will blink for the first

3 seconds

䊊

to remind the driver to be

cautious.

WARNING

∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

∙ Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

∙ A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views. The

misalignment will increase as the line

proceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

width and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the ap-

proximate vehicle width including the out-

side mirrors.

The extensions

䊊

of both the front

䊊

and

side

䊊

lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

LHA4264 LHA2652

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

LHA5002 LHA5003

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines

䊊

do not touch

the object in the display. However, the ve-

hicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the

position

䊊

in the display. However, the po-

sition

䊊

is actually at the same distance as

the position

䊊

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

LHA4995 LHA5004

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

䊊

when the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

When activating the RearView Monitor,

the guide lines, the icons and the mes-

sages may not be displayed immedi-

ately.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines

䊊

enter the park-

ing space

䊊

LHA5043 LHA4770

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel

to the parking space

䊊

while referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the CAMERA or CAMERA

button

or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position to operate the Intelligent Around

View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-

plays different split screen views depend-

ing on the position of the shift lever. When

activating the Intelligent Around View

Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the

messages may not be displayed immedi-

ately. Press the CAMERA or CAMERA

button to switch between the available

views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,

the available views are:

∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (drive)

position, the available views are:

∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

∙ Front view/front-side view split screen

The display will switch from the Intelligent

Around View Monitor screen when:

∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

∙ A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,

Contrast, Black Level, Tint, and Color of the

Intelligent Around View Monitor, press the

SETTING button with the monitor on. Select

one of the items and change the value by

touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the

multi-function controller.

LHA4212

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast,

Black Level, Tint, and Color of the Intelli-

gent Around View Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Intelligent Around View Monitor.

Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-

dance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View

Monitor with the outside mirrors in

the stored position, and make sure

that the liftgate is securely closed

when operating the vehicle using the

Intelligent Around View Monitor.

∙ The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Intelligent Around

View Monitor differs from the actual

distance.

∙ The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above

the rear license plate. Do not put any-

thing on the vehicle that covers the

cameras.

LHA3760

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-

ter may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system does

not warn of moving objects. When in the

front or rear view display, an object below

the bumper or on the ground may not be

viewed

䊊

. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall

object near the seam

䊊

of the camera

viewing areas will not appear in the moni-

tor.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor may differ some-

what from the actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not be clear and the color

of the object may differ in a dark envi-

ronment.

∙ There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the

bird’s-eye view.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that

has been dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry

cloth.

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-

ligent Around View Monitor. This will not

hinder normal driving operation but the

system should be inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LHA3591

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not hin-

der normal driving operation but the sys-

tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-

quently. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

䊊

, the Intelligent AroundView

Monitor may not display objects clearly.

Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3592 LHA3759

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the sonar

function as outlined in this section

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ The sonar is a convenience feature. It

is not a substitute for proper parking.

∙ This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle.

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

∙ Always look around and check that it

is safe to move before parking.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar as contained in this

section.

The sonar function helps to inform the

driver of large stationary objects around

the vehicle when parking by issuing an au-

dible and visual alert.

1. Center display

2. CAMERA or CAMERA

button

3. SETTING button

SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION

The system gives the tone for rear objects

when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)

position.

LHA4817

CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking

sensor) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

When the camera image is shown on the

center display, the system shows the sonar

indicator regardless of the shift lever posi-

tion.

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The colors of the sonar indicators and the

distance guide lines in the front and rear

views indicate different distances to the

object.

When the objects are detected, the indica-

tor (green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of the

blinking and the rate of the tone increase.

When the vehicle is very close to the object,

the indicator stops blinking and turns red,

and the tone sounds continuously.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-

onds when an object is detected by only

the corner sonar and the distance does

not change.

The tone will stop when the object is no

longer near the vehicle.

TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR

FUNCTION

When the “Sonar” key is selected, the indi-

cator will turn off and the sonar will be

turned off temporarily. The Moving Object

Detection (MOD) system will also be turned

off at the same time. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Moving Object Detection

(MOD) in this section. When the “Sonar” key

is selected again, the indicator will turn on

and the sonar will turn back on.

In the below cases, the sonar will be turned

back on automatically:

∙ When the shift lever is placed in the “R”

(Reverse) position.

∙ When the CAMERA or CAMERA

button is pressed and a screen other

than the camera view is shown on the

display.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

LHA4246 LHA4247

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the ignition switch is placed in the

“OFF” position and turned back to the

“ON” position again. To prevent the so-

nar system from activating altogether,

use the “Camera” menu. For additional

information, refer to “Sonar function

settings” in this section.

Sonar function settings

To set up the sonar function to your pre-

ferred settings, press the SETTING button,

select the “Camera/Sonar” key and then

select the “Sonar” key on the center display.

Designs and items displayed on the

screen may vary depending on the mod-

els.

Sonar: When this item is turned on, the rear

sonar is activated. When this item is turned

off (indicator turns off), the rear sonar is

deactivated. The amber markers are dis-

played at the corners of the vehicle icon.

The next time the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position, “sonar is OFF” is dis-

played briefly.

Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity

level of the sonar higher (right) or lower

(left).

Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the

buzzer.

Towing mode (if so equipped): When this

item is turned on, only the rear sonar is off.

The amber markers are displayed at the

rear corners of the vehicle icon.

Show Camera when Sonar Activate (if so

equipped): When this item is turned on, the

camera view is automatically shown on the

display in the case that the distance to the

objects measured by the sonar is becom-

ing short.

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the sonar function. Failure to oper-

ate the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system, including

reduced performance or a false

activation.

∙ The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

∙ The system will not detect small ob-

jects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-

lowing objects:

– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,

cotton, grass or wool.

– Thin objects such as rope, wire or

chain.

– Wedge-shaped objects.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned

or bent, the sensing zone may be al-

tered causing inaccurate measure-

ment of objects or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will

interfere with the tone and it may not

be heard.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

System temporarily unavailable

When the amber markers are displayed at

the corners of the vehicle icon and the

function cannot be activated from the

Camera setting menu (the setting items

are grayed out), the sonar system may be

malfunctioning.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sensors

(located on the front and rear bumper

fascia) free from accumulations of

snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the

surface of the sonar sensors when

cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the

accuracy of the sonar function will be

diminished.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA or CAMERA button

LHA4816

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Mov-

ing Object Detection system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

∙ The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is not

designed to prevent contact with ob-

jects surrounding the vehicle. When

maneuvering, always use the outside

mirrors and rearview mirror and turn

and check the surroundings to ensure

it is safe to maneuver.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

∙ The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary

objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of

moving objects near the vehicle when

backing out of garages, maneuvering in

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

∙ When the CAMERA or CAMERA

button is pressed to activate the cam-

era view on the display.

∙ When vehicle speed decreases below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the

camera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects mov-

ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The

MOD system will not operate if the out-

side mirrors are moving in or out, in the

stowed position, or if either front door is

opened.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the front view.

∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the

MOD system detects moving objects in

the rear view. When activating the Intel-

ligent Around View Monitor, the guide-

lines, the icons and the messages may

not be displayed immediately. The MOD

system will not operate if the liftgate is

open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when in

this view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be

displayed on the view where the objects

are detected. While the MOD system con-

tinues to detect moving objects, the yellow

frame continues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not

chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

䊊

displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where mov-

ing objects are detected.

The yellow frame

䊊

is displayed on each

view in the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon

䊊

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon

䊊

is not displayed.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA5171

Rear and front-side views

LHA4997

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

1. From the main menu, press the SET-

TING button on the control panel

2. Touch the “Camera/Sonar” key

3. Select the “Camera” key

4. Touch “Moving Object Detection” to

switch between ON and OFF.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle

in accordance with these system limita-

tions could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may not

function properly.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

∙ The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental

conditions and surrounding objects

such as:

– When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the moving

objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in

its usual position, such as when a

mirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not

changed.

∙ The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, mov-

ing shadows, etc.

∙ The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, di-

rection, distance or shape of the mov-

ing objects.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the

sensing zone may be altered and the

MOD system may not detect objects

properly.

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not dis-

play objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange

if one of the following has occurred:

∙ When the system is malfunctioning.

∙ When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).

∙ When the RearView camera has de-

tected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate

orange, have the MOD system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

䊊

, the MOD system may not

operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted

mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a

dry cloth.

LHA3759

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Adjust air flow direction for the center vents

䊊

, driver’s and passenger’s side vents

䊊

rear center console vents

䊊

, and rear pas-

senger compartment vents

䊊

by moving

the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.

Open or close the vents using the dial.

Move the dial toward the

to open the

vents or toward the

to close them.

LHA4178

VENTS

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Air recirculation button

2. MODE (manual air flow control)

button

3. Rear CTRL (rear climate display

screen) button

4. REAR ON-OFF button

5. SYNC button/ temperature control

dial (passenger’s side)

REAR window and outside

mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch

ON-OFF button/

fan speed

control dial

Front defroster button

9. AUTO (automatic) climate control

button/ temperature control dial

(driver’s side)

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls

to activate the air conditioner.

LHA4776

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air condi-

tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-

senger compartment through the

vents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air re-

circulation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. This should

help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified

heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as

the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution,

air intake control, and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

the left or right to set the desired tem-

perature.

∙ Adjust the temperature display to

about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, air intake

control and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the vents in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

3. You can individually set driver’s and

front passenger’s side temperature us-

ing each temperature control dial.

∙ To synchronizes the driver’s and front

passenger’s temperature settings,

press the SYNC button. The SYNC indi-

cator will illuminate and SYNC text will

appear in the Climate display.

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate. When

you need to heat only, use this mode.

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

1. If the air conditioner is on, touch the

“A/C” key on the screen. The A/C indica-

tor light will turn off.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, air intake

control and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise,

the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Press the front defroster button

on. (The indicator light on the button

will come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, use the

fan speed

control dial to set the fan speed to

maximum.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, press the AUTO button to

return to the automatic mode.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will auto-

matically be turned on at outside tem-

peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir-

culate mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start with

Intelligent Climate Control (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate

controls and Remote Engine Start function

may go into automatic heating or cooling

mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-

vated depending on outside and cabin

temperatures. During this period, the cli-

mate control display and buttons will be

inoperable until the ignition switch is

turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-

ing mode, the rear window defroster and

heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may

be activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if so

equipped)

When the climate control system is on, the

front and rear fan speeds may be auto-

matically lowered so that commands are

more easily recognized. Fan speed can be

adjusted using the fan speed decrease and

increase buttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control dial

Turn the fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right. Temperature can be ad-

justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The

indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front defrosting mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds

70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may

default to air recirculation mode automati-

cally to reduce overall power consumption.

To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the

air recirculation button (indicator will turn

off) to enter fresh air mode.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually con-

trol the intake air, press the

air recir-

culation button. To return to the automatic

control mode, press and hold the

air

recirculation button for about 2 seconds.

The indicator light will flash twice, and then

the intake air will be controlled automati-

cally.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

A/C (air conditioner) operation

Start the engine, turn the fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the CLIMATE button on the center

multi-function control panel. Touch the

“A/C” key on the screen to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

touch the “A/C” key again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually con-

trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and

foot outlets.

Synchronize climate settings

Press the SYNC button to synchronize cli-

mate settings. The sync indicator will turn

on and SYNC text will appear in the Climate

display.

When rear climate is off, pressing SYNC will

synchronize only driver’s and front passen-

ger’s climate settings. When rear climate is

on, pressing SYNC will synchronize driver,

front passenger, and rear temperature and

fan settings.

To change climate settings when SYNC is

active (the SYNC indicator is on):

∙ The driver’s side temperature control

dial will control the driver, front passen-

ger, and rear (if rear climate is on) tem-

peratures.

∙ The fan speed control dial will control

the front and rear climate fan speeds.

∙ The front AUTO (automatic) climate

control ON-OFF button will activate the

front and rear climate automatic set-

tings.

To exit SYNC:

∙ To remove the front passenger from

SYNC, turn the passenger’s side tem-

perature control dial. The driver and rear

settings remain in SYNC until rear is re-

moved from SYNC.

∙ To remove the rear from SYNC, change

any of the rear climate settings. The

driver and front passenger settings re-

main in SYNC until the front passenger

is removed from SYNC.

∙ To reactivate SYNC press the SYNC but-

ton.

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button to turn the sys-

tem off.

To turn system on

Press the ON-OFF button when the heater

or air conditioner is off. The system will turn

on with the settings that were used imme-

diately before the system was turned off.

CLIMATE button

Press the CLIMATE button on the multi-

function control panel to display the screen

for front air conditioner operations.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor, located on the top

driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps

the system maintain a constant tempera-

ture. Do not put anything on or around this

sensor.

∙ When the climate system is in auto-

matic operation and the engine coolant

temperature and outside air tempera-

ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-

fault to defroster mode for a maximum

of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the engine coolant

temperature warms up, the air flow out-

let will return to foot mode and opera-

tion will continue normally.

∙ When the outside and interior cabin

temperatures are moderate to high, the

intake setting may default to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. You may no-

tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level

mode or side demist vent outlets for a

maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-

cur when the previous climate setting

was turned off. This is not a malfunction.

After the initial warm air is expelled, the

intake will return to automatic control,

the air flow outlet will return to previous

settings, and operation will continue

normally. To exit, press any climate con-

trol button.

∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)

closed while the air conditioner is in op-

eration.

∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you

have selected and the outlets the air is

coming out do not match, select

the

mode.

∙ When you change the air flow mode,

you may feel air flow from the foot out-

lets for just a moment. This is not a

malfunction.

LHA2473

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM

1. REAR ON-OFF button

2. REAR CTRL (Rear Climate display

screen) button

3. ON-OFF button/

fan speed con-

trol dial

4. AUTO button/ temperature control dial

(driver’s side)

To turn on the rear automatic air condition-

ing system with the front air conditioner

control panel, press the REAR ON-OFF but-

ton.

The rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem can be adjusted with the front air con-

ditioner control panel when the Rear Cli-

mate screen is displayed.

To control the rear automatic air condition-

ing system using the display, press the CLI-

MATE button on the center multi-function

control panel and touch the “Rear Climate”

key displayed on the screen. The front dis-

play will switch to the Rear Climate screen.

To control the rear automatic air condition-

ing system using the front air conditioner

control panel, press the REAR CTRL button.

The front display will switch to the Rear

Climate screen.

To adjust the front air conditioning system,

press the CLIMATE button on the center

multi-function control panel.

Automatic operation

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indi-

cator will illuminate in the display.

2. Turn the temperature control dials to

set desired temperature. Temperature

can be controlled using the display

screen. Touch the “

““ ”keysto

set the desired temperature.

Manual operation

∙ Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ Fan speed control

Turn the

Fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed. Fan

speed can also be controlled using the

display screen. Touch the “

”or

“

” key to set the desired fan speed.

Front Controls

LHA4777

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Rear Heating

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indi-

cator will illuminate in the display. Or,

using the touch-screen display, touch

the “AUTO” key on the display and the

feature will activate.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Doing so

may cause the temperature to not be

controlled properly.

Turning the system off

∙ Press the REAR ON-OFF button on the

front control panel to turn the Rear Cli-

mate system off. The indicator light will

turn off.

∙ Press the ON-OFF button. The rear cli-

mate controls will turn off.

Turning the system off using the display

screen

1. To turn the system off using the display

screen, press the CLIMATE button on

the center multi-function control panel

until the Rear Climate screen is dis-

played. When the display shows front

climate control, touch the “Rear Cli-

mate” key displayed on the screen.

2. Touch the “

ON/OFF” key to turn

off the rear controls in the Rear Climate

display screen.

LHA4861 LHA4862

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Rear control buttons

1. OFF button

Fan speed (increase) button

3. AUTO button

Temperature (increase) button

Temperature (decrease) button

6. Display

Fan speed (decrease) button

The rear seat passengers can adjust the

rear automatic air conditioning system us-

ing the control switches at the rear of the

center console.

The rear control buttons do not function

when the Rear Climate screen is shown on

the front display. To activate the rear con-

trol buttons, press the CLIMATE button and

the screen will return to Front Climate con-

trol. This will enable the second row Rear

Climate controls.

∙ OFF button Turns rear automatic air

conditioning system off.

∙ Fan speed

increase and

decrease buttons Adjusts the rear fan

speed up or down.

∙ AUTO button Turns rear automatic air

conditioning system on, AUTO mode

on.

∙ Temperature

increase and

decrease buttons Adjusts the rear

temperature up or down.

Rear Controls

LHA2134

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo-

cated in 1st row in the front media pocket

below the climate controls and in the 2nd

row on the back of the center console.

These ports will charge compatible de-

vices.

NOTE:

The USB/iPod® charging ports will not

operate with the display screen or the

Mobile Entertainment System (MES) (if

so equipped). Only the USB connection

port located in the console box will allow

operation of USB/iPod® devices through

the audio system.

1st row

LHA4870

2nd row

LHA4869

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin

antenna and an antenna pattern is printed

inside the rear window.

CAUTION

∙ Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................................5-7

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-7

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-8

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-9

Driving safety precautions ....................5-9

Push-button ignition switch .....................5-11

Operating range.............................5-12

Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-12

Emergency engine shut off ..................5-13

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

discharge ...................................5-14

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-14

Before starting the engine......................5-15

Starting the engine .............................5-15

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........5-16

Driving the vehicle ..............................5-16

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) ........................................5-16

Parking brake ..................................5-21

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .......5-22

BSW system operation ......................5-23

How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-25

BSW system limitations......................5-25

BSW driving situations .......................5-26

System temporarily unavailable .............5-30

System maintenance........................5-31

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-32

RCTA system operation......................5-33

How to enable/disable the RCTA

system ......................................5-35

RCTA system limitations .....................5-36

System temporarily unavailable .............5-39

System maintenance........................5-40

Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-41

Precautions on cruise control................5-41

Cruise control operations....................5-42

Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-43

ICC system operation .......................5-44

The ICC switch ..............................5-46

ICC system limitations.......................5-52

System temporarily unavailable .............5-55

System maintenance........................5-57

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ...........5-58

AEB system operation .......................5-59

Turning the AEB system on/off ..............5-61

AEB system limitations ......................5-61

System temporarily unavailable .............5-63

System malfunction .........................5-64

System maintenance........................5-64

Break-in schedule ..............................5-65

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-66

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-67

Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4) (if so equipped)............5-67

I–4x4 system operation......................5-67

Parking/parking on hills ........................ 5-71

Power steering .................................5-72

Brake system...................................5-73

Brake precautions ...........................5-73

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-73

Brake Assist .................................5-74

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-75

Rise-up and build-up ........................5-77

Brake force distribution......................5-77

Hill descent control system (if so equipped).....5-78

Hill start assist system..........................5-78

Rear Sonar System (RSS) .......................5-79

Cold weather driving ...........................5-80

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-80

Antifreeze ...................................5-80

Battery......................................5-80

Draining of coolant water....................5-80

Tire equipment ..............................5-80

Special winter equipment ...................5-81

Driving

on snow or ice .......................5-81

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-81

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise ex-

haust gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the

air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or the

body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears in the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air” warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the on position as

long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

∙ You can also check the pressure of all

tires (except the spare tire) on the ve-

hicle information display screen. The or-

der of the tire pressure figures dis-

played on the screen corresponds with

the actual order of the tire position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute.

Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

∙ Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception

of the signals from the tire pressure

sensors, and the TPMS will not func-

tion properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases.

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

Starting and driving 5-5

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the ve-

hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition. Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators

flash three times. To correct the pres-

sure, push the core of the valve stem

on the tire briefly to release pressure.

When the pressure reaches the des-

ignated pressure, the horn beeps

once.

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds af-

ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-

cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is

not operating.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-

Fill Tire Alert under the following con-

ditions:

– If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate the

tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tire

pressure sensor is not registered to

the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-

sor is low.

5-6 Starting and driving

∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-

erate due to TPMS interference, move

the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward

or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a

tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-

hicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road,allow-

ing you to anticipate problems. However,

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel

Drive vehicles any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform satis-

factorily under off-road conditions. If at all

possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-

over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

safety precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

Starting and driving 5-7

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

5-8 Starting and driving

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under

the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-

sands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-

cal laws vary on what is considered to be

legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most

people underestimate the effects of alco-

hol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving in

deep water or mud as your NISSAN is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-

els are less capable than 4-Wheel Drive

(4WD) models for rough road driving and

extrication when stuck in deep snow or

mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surfaces may cause the 4WD warning

message to display and the 4WD sys-

tem to automatically switch from the

4WD to the 2WD mode. This could re-

duce the traction. Be especially care-

ful when towing a trailer (4WD

models).

∙ Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road ve-

hicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-

hicle. If you drive up them, you may

stall. If you drive down them, you may

not be able to control your speed. If

you drive across them, you may roll

over.

∙ Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-

off or other hazard that could cause

an accident.

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill, never

attempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in R (Reverse) gear and

apply brakes to control your speed.

∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and

fade, resulting in loss of control and

an accident. Apply brakes lightly and

use a low gear to control your speed.

∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough ter-

rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will

not be thrown forward and cause in-

jury to you or your passengers.

∙ Secure heavy loads in the cargo area

as far forward and as low as possible.

Do not equip the vehicle with tires

larger than specified in this manual.

This could cause your vehicle to roll

over.

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

∙ Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

∙ Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher cen-

ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ When a wheel is off the ground due to

an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a

higher center of gravity than a pas-

senger car. The vehicle is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as passenger cars.

5-10 Starting and driving

∙ Failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly could result in loss of control

and/or a rollover accident.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted, or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Install tire chains on

the front wheels when driving on slip-

pery roads and drive carefully.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Brake

system” in this section.

∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent mainte-

nance may be required. For additional

information, refer to “Severe driving

conditions” in the “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-

tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-

cept in an emergency. (The engine will

stop when the ignition switch is pushed

three consecutive times in quick suc-

cession or the ignition switch is pushed

and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is being

driven, this could lead to a crash and

serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch will illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

∙ Once to change to ACC.

∙ Two times to change to ON.

∙ Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re-

turn to the LOCK position when any door is

either opened or closed with the switch in

the OFF position.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-11

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be

switched to OFF until the shift lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the OFF position, proceed as fol-

lows:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the

OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the ignition switch cannot be moved

from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pres-

ent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range be-

comes narrower and may not function

properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,

to push the ignition switch to start the en-

gine.

The operating range of the engine start

function is inside of the vehicle

䊊

∙ The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key

may function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel or inside the glove

box, storage bin or door pocket, the In-

telligent Key may not function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it

is pushed to the ACC position while carry-

ing the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door

is opened or closed with the ignition

switched off.

LSD2020

5-12 Starting and driving

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries, such as the radio, when the engine is

not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF position

after a period of time under the following

conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some

time under the following conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ACC or ON position

when the engine is not running for an

extended period. This can discharge the

battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position

when the engine is turned off using the

ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on

the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three

consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for

more than 2 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-13

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®

is discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-

ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change to ACC.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-

ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sounds. The engine will

start.

NOTE:

∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine

is started by the above procedure, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display even when the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the In-

telligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator, touch the ignition switch with

the Intelligent Key again.

∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge indicator appears, replace the

battery as soon as possible. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

SSD0860

5-14 Starting and driving

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. Depress the brake pedal and

push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and while holding, crank the en-

gine. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch

to the ON position to start cranking

the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After

cranking the engine, release the ac-

celerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal

and pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above pro-

cedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up:

Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-15

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the Remote Engine

Start require the ignition switch to be

placed in the ON position before the shift

lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON

position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-16 Starting and driving

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

This Continuously Variable Transmis-

sion is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed be-

fore shifting from P (Park) to any driv-

ing position while the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any

of the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position while the ready light il-

luminates.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever to a driving

position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot

brake pedal and then gradually start

the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-17

CAUTION

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

Shifting

Press the button

䊊

while depressing

the brake pedal

Press the button

䊊

to shift

Shift without pressing the

䊊

button

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal, press the shift lever button

and move the shift lever from the P (Park)

position to any of the desired shift posi-

tions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the shift lever button

pressed to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

LSD2127

5-18 Starting and driving

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped be-

fore selecting the R (Reverse) position. The

brake pedal must be depressed and the

shift lever button pressed to move the

shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any

drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

L(Low)

Use this position for engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep

slopes and whenever approaching sharp

bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in

any other circumstances.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the

P (Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the shift lever button

pressed. To move the shift lever, perform

the following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover

䊊

using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release

䊊

using a suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button

䊊

and

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position

䊊

while holding down the

shift lock release. The vehicle may be

moved to the desired location. Replace

the removed shift lock release cover

after the operation. If the shift lever

cannot be moved out of the P (Park)

position, have the Continuously Vari-

able Transmission system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

LSD2128

Starting and driving 5-19

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with

the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,

the

indicator light in the instrument

panel illuminates. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Overdrive OFF indicator light”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

Use the overdrive OFF mode when you

need improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push

the O/D OFF switch again. The

indi-

cator light will turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when

the shift lever is moved to any position

other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF

mode will be automatically turned off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid tem-

perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-

perature becomes too high (for example,

when climbing steep grades in high tem-

peratures with heavy loads, such as when

towing a trailer), engine power and, under

some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-

creased automatically to reduce the

chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelera-

tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed

may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will oc-

cur even if all electrical circuits are func-

tioning properly. In this case, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then push the

switch back to the ON position. The ve-

hicle should return to its normal operat-

ing condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have the

transmission checked and repaired, if

necessary. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2246

5-20 Starting and driving

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-

curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced.The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary, pull

to the side of the road at a safe place

and allow the transmission to return to

normal operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking

brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal

and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion your vehicle will move to ensure it

is safe to change lanes. Never rely

solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors

䊊

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately

10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD2707

Detection zone

SSD1030

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

5-22 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 mph (32km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-

tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is

then activated, the system chimes (twice)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light

continues to flash until the detected ve-

hicles leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-

nates for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW driving

situations” in this section.

LSD2765

Starting and driving 5-23

The BSW system automatically turns on

every time the engine is started, as long as

it is activated using the settings menu on

the vehicle information display.

LSD2764

5-24 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

When the BSW system is enabled in the

vehicle information display, the system can

be turned off by pushing the warning sys-

tems switch. For additional information, re-

fer to “Warning systems switch” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Press the

button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys-

tem on or off.

NOTE:

∙ When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current set-

tings even if the engine is restarted.

∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is

integrated into the BSW system.

There is not a separate selection in

the vehicle information display for

the RCTA system. When the BSW is

disabled, the RCTA system is also dis-

abled.

∙ When the BSW system is turned on,

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the

vehicle information display illumi-

nates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles

in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

Starting and driving 5-25

∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two lanes

away.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects; how-

ever, objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a nor-

mal operation condition.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

5-26 Starting and driving

Another vehicle approaching

from behind

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-

tection zone from behind in an adjacent

lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal when another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly

from behind.

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Starting and driving 5-27

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-

minates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are trav-

eling close together.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Illustration3–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2302

Illustration4–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2303

5-28 Starting and driving

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-

minates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙ If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

∙ The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-29

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator

(white) will blink

䊊

in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-

tion may also be caused by objects such as

ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-

sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2763

5-30 Starting and driving

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction

warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-

cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-

formation display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊

for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area

around the radar sensors is damaged due

to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2707

Starting and driving 5-31

For Canada

Model: SRR3–B

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Cana-

da’s RSS-310. Operation is subject to the

condition that this device must not cause

harmful interference and must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice. Cet appareil est conforme au RSS-310

d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est

soumis à la condition que cet appareil ne

provoque pas d’interférences nuisibles et

accepte toute interférence, y compris les

interférences susceptibles de provoquer

un fonctionnement indésirable de

l’appareil.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RCTA

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When backing out

of a parking space, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction your vehicle will

move. Never rely solely on the RCTA

system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-

signed to detect other vehicles approach-

ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the

system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

5-32 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and

the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is

operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from either side, the system chimes (once)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-

ing from.

LSD2765

Starting and driving 5-33

The RCTA system uses radar sensors

䊊

installed on both sides near the rear bum-

per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors

䊊

can detect an ap-

proaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2707

5-34 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

When the RCTA system is enabled in the

vehicle information display, the system can

be turned off by pushing the warning sys-

tems switch. For additional information, re-

fer to “Warning systems switch” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys-

tem on or off.

When the RCTA system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle

information display illuminates.

LSD2764

Starting and driving 5-35

NOTE:

∙ The RCTA system is integrated into

the BSW system. There is not a sepa-

rate selection in the vehicle informa-

tion display for the RCTA system.

When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA

system is also disabled.

∙ When enabling/disabling the system,

the system setting will be retained

even if the engine is restarted.

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD3195

5-36 Starting and driving

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the RCTA system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ Always check surroundings and turn

to check what is behind you before

backing up. The radar sensors detect

approaching (moving) vehicles. The

radar sensors cannot detect every

object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately

19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain

situations:

– Illustration

䊊

: When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

– Illustration

䊊

: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration

䊊

: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration

䊊

: When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s

parking lot aisle.

– Illustration

䊊

: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles

∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system

volume, open vehicle window) will in-

terfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-37

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-

site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may

not be sounded by the RCTA system af-

ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-38 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator

(white) will blink

䊊

in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2763

Starting and driving 5-39

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will

turn off automatically. The system mal-

function warning message with the

BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in

the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊

for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area

around the radar sensors is damaged due

to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2707

5-40 Starting and driving

For Canada

Model: SRR3–B

Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Cana-

da’s RSS-310. Operation is subject to the

condition that this device must not cause

harmful interference and must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice. Cet appareil est conforme au RSS-310

d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est

soumis à la condition que cet appareil ne

provoque pas d’interférences nuisibles et

accepte toute interférence, y compris les

interférences susceptibles de provoquer

un fonctionnement indésirable de

l’appareil.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The

indicator illuminates in the vehicle infor-

mation display then blinks to warn the

driver. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

∙ If the

indicator blinks, push the

cruise control ON/OFF switch off and

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ The

indicator may blink when the

cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed

ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES,

COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-

erly set the cruise control system, use

the following procedures.

LSD2218

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-41

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

cruise control ON/OFF switch on. The

indicator (white) in the vehicle information

display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The

indicator (green) in the vehicle information

display will illuminate. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains

the set speed.

∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the

indi-

cator (green) in the vehicle information

display goes out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the

indicator

(green) goes out.

∙ Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off. The

indicator in the vehicle in-

formation display go out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the

indicator (green) in the

vehicle information display goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET

switch. The preset speed is deleted

from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

5-42 Starting and driving

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warn-

ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-

er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

∙ Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system.

To avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent ac-

cidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do

not use the ICC system except in ap-

propriate road and traffic conditions.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-

rection.

The ICC system uses a radar sensor

䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to detect

vehicles traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving

vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the

vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-

proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

LSD2708

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-43

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of you within

the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to

144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set

speed can be selected by the driver be-

tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based

on road conditions.

The vehicle travels at the set speed when

the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front

of you and can reduce the speed to match

a slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-

celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traf-

fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle

speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a

vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,

the distance between vehicles may be-

come closer because the ICC system can-

not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.

If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a

LSD3340

5-44 Starting and driving

warning chime and blink the system dis-

play to notify the driver to take necessary

action.

For additional information, refer to “Ap-

proach warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

ICC system:

∙ When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20 and

90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-

hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill within the

limitations of the system. The system

will cancel once it judges a standstill

with a warning chime.

∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

ICC system accelerates and maintains

vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed

to maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system will accelerate and main-

tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to main-

tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

SSD0254

Starting and driving 5-45

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-

ing the ICC system.

THE ICC SWITCH

The system is operated by the CRUISE

ON/OFF switch and four control switches,

all mounted on the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed.

2. ACCEL/RES switch:

Resumes set speed or increases

speed incrementally.

3. COAST/SET switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally.

4. DISTANCE

switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

∙ Long

∙ Middle

∙ Short

5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

LSD2739

5-46 Starting and driving

The ICC system display and

indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:

∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): In-

dicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch is ON.

∙ ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set.

∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be-

tween vehicles set with the distance

switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle

in front of you.

Operating ICC

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

䊊

The ICC system ON indicator (white), set

distance indicator and set vehicle speed

indicator come on in a standby state for

setting.

LSD2285 LSD2740

Starting and driving 5-47

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC

system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead

detection indicator, set distance indicator

and set vehicle speed indicator

䊊

will

come on. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set

speed.

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-

der the following conditions, the system

cannot be set and the ICC indicators will

blink for approximately 2 seconds:

∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

∙ When the shift lever is not in D (Drive)

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When the brakes are operated by the

driver

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-

der the following conditions, the system

cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message

will pop up:

∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system.

Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn

off the ICC system and reset the ICC

switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch again.)

For additional information about the

VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in this section.

∙ When ABS or VDC is operating

∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no

longer slipping. Push the CRUISE

ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC sys-

tem, and reset the ICC system by push-

ing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)

䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

System set display without vehicle

ahead

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

LSD2741 LSD2288

5-48 Starting and driving

NOTE:

∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

∙ When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system con-

trols the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-

tem will be canceled.

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator

䊊

will flash when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle detect indicator will turn off when the

area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the

ICC system, you can depress the accelera-

tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

䊊

System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

System set display without vehicle

ahead

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-

hicle speed indicator will go out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

ICC indicators will go out.

LSD2289 LSD2288

Starting and driving 5-49

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

The set vehicle speed will increase by

approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release the

ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will increase by ap-

proximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

The set vehicle speed will decrease by

approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

∙ Push, then quickly release the

COAST/SET switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will decrease by ap-

proximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed

when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph

(32 km/h).

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traf-

fic conditions.

Each time the distance

switch

䊊

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

LSD2742

5-50 Starting and driving

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longer

the distance.

∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long.” (Each time the engine

is started, the initial setting becomes

“long.”)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

∙ The chime sounds.

∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing.

∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when

the ICC sensor detects objects on the

side of the vehicle or on the side of the

road. This may cause the ICC system to

decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The

ICC sensor may detect these objects

when the vehicle is driven on winding

roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when

entering or exiting a curve. In these

cases you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your ve-

hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-

hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

LSD2429

Starting and driving 5-51

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the ICC system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This sys-

tem should be used in evenly flowing

traffic. Do not use the system on roads

with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in

heavy rain or in fog.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive

or absentminded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

other bad weather. Decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system.

The system will cancel once it judges

that the vehicle has come to a stand-

still and sound a warning chime. To

prevent the vehicle from moving, the

driver must depress the brake pedal.

∙ Always pay attention to the operation

of the vehicle and be ready to manu-

ally control the proper following dis-

tance. The ICC system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance be-

tween vehicles (following distance) or

selected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

SSD0252

5-52 Starting and driving

∙ The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system under

the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-

hicle may go beyond the set ve-

hicle speed and frequent braking

may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it dif-

ficult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

– Interference by other radar

sources

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles

∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-

hicle ahead and the system may not oper-

ate properly:

∙ When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

∙ When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of

your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitations of the system.

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance detection mode to maintain the se-

lected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the centerline

of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-53

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the ICC sen-

sor may detect vehicles in a different lane,

or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC

system to decelerate or accelerate the ve-

hicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

SSD0253

5-54 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-

tem is automatically canceled. A chime will

sound and the system will not be able to be

set:

∙ When the VDC system is turned off

∙ When the VDC or ABS operates

∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

∙ When the system judges the vehicle is

at a standstill

∙ When the shift lever is not in D (Drive)

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When a wheel slips

LSD2615

Starting and driving 5-55

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC

system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the ICC system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor area is covered

with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl

bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect

vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC

system may not cancel and may not be

able to maintain the selected following dis-

tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor area.

The system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear

in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, or

long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving

next to long walls), the system may illumi-

nate the system warning light (orange) and

display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Ob-

struction” message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, park

the vehicle in a safe location and turn the

engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor

window is blocked. If the radar sensor win-

dow is blocked, remove the blocking mate-

rial. Restart the engine. If the warning light

continues to illuminate, have the ICC sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, a chime sounds and the system

warning light (orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning. Al-

though the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2411 LSD2395

5-56 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system

䊊

is located

on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not touch or re-

move the screw located on the sensor.

Doing so could cause failure or mal-

function. If the sensor is damaged due

to an accident, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor.This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reason-

able protection against harmful interference

when the equipment is operated in a com-

mercial environment. This equipment gen-

erates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency

energy and, if not installed and used in ac-

cordance with the instruction manual, may

cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. Operation of this equipment in a

residential area is likely to cause harmful in-

terference in which case the user will be re-

quired to correct the interference at his own

expense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between the

radiator and your body.

LSD2708

Starting and driving 5-57

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device must not cause interfer-

ence,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-

tions suivantes:

1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage,

2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement

for the driver’s attention to traffic

conditions or responsibility to drive

safely. It cannot prevent accidents

due to carelessness or dangerous

driving techniques.

∙ The AEB system does not function in

all driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when

there is a risk of a forward collision with the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor

䊊

located behind the lower grille of the front

bumper to measure the distance to the

vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD2708

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB)

5-58 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB emergency warning indicator

3. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-

mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB system will provide an initial warn-

ing to the driver by both a visual and au-

dible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

system detects that there is still the possi-

bility of a forward collision, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If

the driver does not take action, the AEB

system issues the second visual warning

(red) and audible warning and also applies

partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,

the AEB system applies harder braking au-

tomatically.

LSD2639

Starting and driving 5-59

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and

roadway conditions, the system may help

the driver avoid a forward collision or may

help mitigate the consequences of a colli-

sion, should one be unavoidable. If the

driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-

erating or braking, the AEB system will

function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary to avoid a collision.

∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-

tected ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,

the vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

LSD2766

5-60 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB

systems ON or OFF.

1. Press the

button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the

button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press

the ENTER button.

3. Select “System” and press the ENTER

button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The AEB system will be automatically

turned on when the engine is restarted.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the AEB system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB

system will not function when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following

conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the

AEB system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, continue to depress the

accelerator pedal to override the

system.

∙ Braking distances increase on slip-

pery surfaces.

Starting and driving 5-61

∙ The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functionality,

within certain limitations. The system

may not detect some forms of ob-

structions of the sensor area such as

ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,

the system may not be able to worn

the driver properly. Be sure that you

check, clean and clear the sensor area

regularly.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

When driving on some roads such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the sensor

may detect vehicles in a different lane, or

may temporarily not detect a vehicle trav-

eling ahead. This may cause the system to

work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the sys-

tem may warn you by blinking the sys-

tem indicator and sounding the chime

unexpectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from

the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0253

5-62 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-

ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-

dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

LSD2616

Starting and driving 5-63

system warning light (orange) and display

the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the

engine off. Clean the radar cover on the

lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the warning message [Mal-

function] will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

AEB system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

䊊

is located behind the lower

grille of the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-

lar objects on the front bumper near

the sensor area. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-

tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

LSD2708

5-64 Starting and driving

Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful in-

terference when the equipment is oper-

ated in a commercial environment. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radi-

ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-

stalled and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful in-

terference to radio communications. Op-

eration of this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to

correct the interference at his own ex-

pense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment. This equipment

should be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between the

radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device must not cause interfer-

ence,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-

tions suivantes:

1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage,

2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnne-

ment.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or

other parts could be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

Starting and driving 5-65

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-66 Starting and driving

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

I–4X4 SYSTEM OPERATION

WARNING

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires. Accelerating

quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or

sudden braking may cause loss of

control, even with I-4x4 engaged.

∙ For 4–Wheel Drive (4WD) equipped ve-

hicles, do not attempt to raise two

wheels off the ground and shift the

transmission to any drive or reverse

position with the engine running. Do-

ing so may result in drivetrain dam-

age or unexpected vehicle movement

which could result in serious personal

injury or vehicle damage.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT 4X4 (I-4x4) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-67

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing) or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure that you inform

the test facility personnel that your

vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it

is placed on a dynamometer. Using

the wrong test equipment may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious personal injury or vehicle

damage.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are

raised.

∙ If you use the free roller, rotate four

wheels with the same speed without

raising any wheels.

∙ If a 4WD warning message is dis-

played while driving there may be a

malfunction in the 4WD system. Re-

duce the vehicle speed immediately

and have your vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

∙ If the 4WD high temperature message

is displayed while you are driving, pull

off the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change

to 2WD to prevent the 4WD system

from malfunctioning. If the warning

message turns off, you can drive

again.

∙ If the incorrect tire size message is

displayed while you are driving, pull

off the road in a safe area with the

engine idling. Check that all tire sizes

are the same, that the tire pressure is

correct and that the tires are not ex-

cessively worn.

∙ If a warning message continues to be

displayed after the above operations,

have your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4WD shift switch

The 4WD system is used to select the 2WD,

AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the

driving conditions.

Turn the 4WD mode switch, located on the

center console, to select 2WD, AUTO, or

LOCK.

∙ 2WD – Turn the 4WD mode switch to the

2WD position. The 2WD indicator in the

vehicle information display illuminates.

LSD2496

5-68 Starting and driving

∙ AUTO – Turn the 4WD mode switch to

the neutral (AUTO) position. The 4WD

AUTO indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display illuminates.

∙ LOCK – To engage the LOCK mode, turn

the 4WD mode switch to the LOCK po-

sition. The switch will return to the AUTO

position automatically and the 4WD

LOCK indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display illuminates. To disengage

the LOCK mode, turn the switch to the

LOCK position again. The switch will re-

turn to the AUTO position automatically,

and the 4WD LOCK indicator turns into

the AUTO indicator. The LOCK mode will

automatically be canceled when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the OFF posi-

tion.

4WD mode Wheels driven 4WD mode indicator Use conditions

2WD

Front only – This

mode is used when

driving on a normal

road *1

2WD

For driving on dry

paved roads.

AUTO

Distribution of torque

to the front and rear

wheels changes au-

tomatically depend-

ing on road condi-

tions encountered.

This results in im-

proved driving

stability.

AUTO

For driving on paved

or slippery roads.

LOCK

4-Wheel Drive *2 *3

LOCK

For driving on rough

roads.

*1 The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving

conditions.

*2 The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has

been driven at a high speed. The 4WD LOCK indicator turns into the AUTO indicator.

*3 The LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-69

4WD shift tips

∙ If the 4WD mode switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or de-

celerating, or if the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position while in the

AUTO or LOCK mode, you may feel a jolt.

This is normal.

∙ The oil temperature of powertrain parts

will increase if the vehicle is continu-

ously operated under conditions where

the difference between the front and

rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as

when driving the vehicle on rough roads

through sand or mud or when freeing a

stuck vehicle. In these cases, the 4WD

mode changes to the 2WD mode to

protect the powertrain parts.

∙ Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the

same as 2WD.

CAUTION

∙ Depending on the driving condition,

the 4WD mode may automatically

change from 2WD to 4WD even when

the 2WD mode is selected. If this oc-

curs while driving, the 4WD mode indi-

cator will not illuminate.

∙ Do not start the engine with the 4WD

mode switch in any mode in the fol-

lowing cases:

– When the vehicle is placed on a fre-

eroller or jacking up the vehicle

with the front tires raised and the

rear tires on the ground.

– When towing the vehicle with the

rear tires raised from the ground.

∙ Operate the 4WD mode switch only

when driving straight. Do not operate

the 4WD mode switch when making a

turn or backing up.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD mode switch

with the front wheel spinning.

∙ Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be especially

careful when starting or driving on

slippery surfaces with the 4WD mode

switch set in the AUTO mode.

4WD mode indicators

The 2WD, 4WD AUTO and LOCK mode indi-

cators are located in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The 4WD mode indicators will display the

mode selected by the 4WD mode switch

while the engine is running.

The 4WD AUTO indicator illuminates when

selecting the AUTO mode.

The 4WD LOCK indicator illuminates when

selecting the LOCK mode and the 2WD in-

dicator illuminates when selecting the 2WD

mode.

5-70 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙

Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-71

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assist while driving to oper-

ate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and protect it from getting

damaged. While the power assist is re-

duced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. When the temperature of the

power steering system goes down, the

power assist level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-

erations that could cause the power steer-

ing system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not

functioning properly and may need servic-

ing. Have the power steering system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, there will

be no power assist for the steering, but you

will still have control of the vehicle. At this

time, greater steering effort is required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

POWER STEERING

5-72 Starting and driving

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-73

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

5-74 Starting and driving

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator light in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the

and indicator lights come

on in the instrument panel. The VDC sys-

tem automatically turns off when these in-

dicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The

indicator light and

the AEB system warning light illuminate to

indicate the VDC and AEB systems are off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-75

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off

the system, the VDC system still operates

to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The

indicator light flashes if

this occurs. All other VDC functions are off

and the

indicator light will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the

indicator light may flash or

both the

and indicator

lights may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the

and the indicator lights

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and indicator lights may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the

indicator light

may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or both the

and indi-

cator lights may illuminate. This is not

a malfunction. Restart the engine af-

ter driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the

indicator light

may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

5-76 Starting and driving

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP

The system gradually adjusts braking

power during normal braking to help pro-

vide an enhanced brake feel.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the four wheels depending

on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the

indicator light may flash or

both the

and indicator

lights may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the

and the indicator lights

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and indicator lights may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the

indicator light

may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or both the

and indi-

cator lights may illuminate. This is not

a malfunction. Restart the engine af-

ter driving onto a stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the

indicator light

may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

Starting and driving 5-77

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully and at-

tentively when using the hill descent

control system and decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal if necessary. Be especially care-

ful when driving on frozen, muddy or

extremely steep downhill roads. Fail-

ure to control vehicle speed may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

The hill descent control system can only be

activated when the 4WD LOCK mode is en-

gaged.

The hill descent control system helps

maintain vehicle speed when driving under

15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill

grades. Hill descent control is useful when

engine braking alone cannot control ve-

hicle speed. Hill descent control applies the

vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed al-

lowing the driver to concentrate on steer-

ing while reducing the burden of brake and

accelerator operation.

If the hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light is blinking, the hill descent control

is engaged; however, the hill descent con-

trol will not control the vehicle speed.

∙ Once the system is activated, the indi-

cator light will remain on in the instru-

ment panel. For additional information,

refer to “Hill descent control system ON

indicator light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending

steep downhill grades, the hill descent con-

trol switch should be on and the shift lever

in L (Low gear) for engine braking.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. De-

press the brake pedal when the ve-

hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-

pecially careful when stopped on a hill

on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards may result in a loss of control of

the vehicle and possible serious injury

or death.

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and may

result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

∙ The hill start assist may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards on

a hill under all load or road conditions.

Always be prepared to depress the

brake pedal to prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

5-78 Starting and driving

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent

the vehicle from rolling backward in the

time it takes the driver to release the brake

pedal and apply the accelerator when the

vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ The shift lever is moved to a forward or

reverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and hill start assist will stop operating

completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the

shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park)

or on a flat and level road.

WARNING

∙ Always turn and look back before

backing up. The RSS is not a substi-

tute for proper backing procedures.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the RSS as contained in this section.

Inclement weather may affect the

function of the RSS; this may include

reduced performance or a false

activation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving

objects.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper, and

may not detect objects close to the

bumper or on the ground.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-

aligned or bent, the sensing zone may

be altered causing inaccurate mea-

surement of obstacles or false alarms.

The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of

obstacles near the rear bumper when the

shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may

not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph

(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-

lar or moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft

(1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a de-

creased coverage area at the outer cor-

ners of the bumper (refer to the illustration

for approximate zone coverage areas). As

you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of

the tone increases. When the obstacle is

less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will

sound continuously. If the RSS detects a

stationary or receding object further than

10 in. (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle,

LSD0095

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS)

Starting and driving 5-79

the tone will sound for only 3 seconds.

Once the system detects an object ap-

proaching, the tone will sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the

shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The RSS can be turned off in the vehicle

information display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual. To turn the RSS off, the

ignition switch must be placed in the ON

position.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear

bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt (do not clean

the sensors with sharp objects). If the sen-

sors are covered, it will affect the accuracy

of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole, or use the

NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-

ing the engine block. Refill before operating

the vehicle. For additional information, refer

to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-80 Starting and driving

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)

or lower.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

Starting and driving 5-81

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least2-4hours, de-

pending on outside temperatures, to

properly warm the engine coolant. Use

an appropriate timer to turn the engine

block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

5-82 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

Emergency engine shut off ......................6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-3

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-4

Jump starting ..................................6-10

Push starting ...................................6-12

If your vehicle overheats ........................6-12

Towing your vehicle ............................6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-14

Vehicle recovery

(freeing a stuck vehicle)......................6-16

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙

Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and

the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information display,

one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. If equipped, the system also

displays pressure of all tires (except the

spare tire) on the display screen by sending

a signal from a sensor that is installed in

each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven

with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pres-

sure warning light. This system will activate

only when the vehicle is driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional in-

formation, refer to “Warning lights, indicator

lights and audible reminders” in “Instru-

ments and controls” section and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” sections of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible, If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted

into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage

board in the cargo area using the

handle.

2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by

lifting up using the handles.

It should not be necessary to remove or

dislocate the Bose® subwoofer (if so

equipped)

䊊

when removing the jack and

tool kit cover

䊊

LCE2407 LCE2036 LCE2340

In case of emergency 6-5

3. Remove the tool kit

䊊

by releasing the

Velcro straps

䊊

4. Remove the jack.

∙ The jack is secured by a fastener

䊊

To release the fastener, assemble the

jacking rod

䊊

into the wheel nut

wrench

䊊

and rotate counterclock-

wise to release.

∙ Insert the flat end of the wheel nut

wrench

䊊

into the slot of the fas-

tener

䊊

, and rotate counterclock-

wise to release the jack.

5. The lowering mechanism for the spare

tire is located on the passenger side of

the cargo area. Remove the cover

䊊

access the lowering mechanism.

6. Attach the spare tire winch socket

䊊

to the lowering mechanism nut.

7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel

nut wrench

䊊

into the jacking rod

䊊

and insert the T-shaped end of the jack-

ing rod into the winch socket

䊊

and

rotate counterclockwise.

8. Once the spare tire is lowered, release it

from the vehicle by guiding the lower-

ing cable and winch through the cen-

ter of the tire.

LCE2348 LCE2350 LCE2351

6-6 In case of emergency

NOTE:

Fully lower the spare tire below the ve-

hicle before attempting to remove the

winch from the spare tire.

9. After removing the spare tire from un-

der the vehicle, be sure to crank the

cable up by rotating the winch socket

clockwise to stow it.

CAUTION

∙ Make sure safety cable is coiled above

spare tire when reinstalling spare

tire/wheel.

∙ When re-installing the spare tire un-

der the vehicle after use, be sure to

secure it with the tire stem facing

down toward the ground. If the spare

tire is improperly secured with the tire

stem facing up towards the bottom of

the vehicle, there is an increased risk

of separating from the vehicle in the

event of a crash which may pose a

hazard in traffic or risk of injury to

others.

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-

rect placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

In case of emergency 6-7

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning counterclockwise with

the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove

the wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. The jack-up points are

indicated by the notches under the

frame.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

LDI3310

6-8 In case of emergency

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the

jack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle

until the tire clears the ground.

NOTE:

If the lug nut wrench/jack handle con-

tacts the ground while raising the ve-

hicle, disassemble the lug nut wrench

from the jack extension rod, rotate it 90

degrees and reassemble.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-

move the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (

䊊

)

until they are tight.

LCE0087

LCE2043 WCE0056

In case of emergency 6-9

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (

䊊

). Lower the ve-

hicle completely.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 621 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and

jacking equipment in the vehicle.

6. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the two vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater,

air conditioner, etc.).

3. Connect the jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (

䊊

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

5. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the ig-

nition switch in the OFF position and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

6. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

CAUTION

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started

or tow-started. Attempting to do so

may cause transmission damage.

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant res-

ervoir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading and the Low Oil Pressure: See

Owner’s Manual warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display), or

if you feel a lack of engine power, detect

abnormal noise, etc. take the following

steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine. Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-

hicle repaired. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional

and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment

could damage your vehicle. Towing in-

structions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are gener-

ally familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-

ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator

carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat

towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

LCE2237

6-14 In case of emergency

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models equipped with a

CVT with any of the wheels on the

ground as this may cause serious and

expensive damage to the transfer case

and transmission due to the lack of

lubrication.

Two-Wheel Drive models with

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

LCE2041

In case of emergency 6-15

CAUTION

∙ Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels

on the ground (forward or backward),

as this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the transmission. If it

is necessary to tow the vehicle with

the rear wheels raised always use

towing dollies under the front wheels.

∙ When towing CVT models with the

rear wheels on the ground or on tow-

ing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

6-16 In case of emergency

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-17

MEMO

6-18 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-3

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels .......................7-3

Chromeparts................................7-4

Tire dressings ................................7-4

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-5

Power moonroof (if so equipped) .............7-5

Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-6

Seatbelts.................................... 7-7

Cleaning the seat tracks...................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........7-8

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not concentrate water spray di-

rectly on the sonar sensors (if so

equipped) on the bumper as this will

result in damage to the sensors. Do

not use pressure washers capable of

spraying water over 1,200 psi

(8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use

of high-pressure washers over

1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in dam-

age to or removal of paint or graphics.

Avoid using a high-pressure washer

closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the

vehicle. Always use a wide-angle

nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving

and do not concentrate the water

spray on any one area.

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

POWER MOONROOF (if so

equipped)

The sunshade is made from a tricot mate-

rial.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moon-

roof while cleaning:

∙ Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface of

the material or cause a stain to

spread.

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar chemical to clean the sun-

shade. This may discolor the moon-

roof and damage the surface.

∙ Clean water based stains by patting

the surface with a clean soft cloth

dampened in warm water. Press a

clean dry cloth onto the surface to re-

move as much dampness as possible

and then let air dry.

∙ Clean oil based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth damp-

ened in warm water. Press a clean dry

cloth onto the surface to remove as

much dampness as possible and then

let air dry.

Appearance and care 7-5

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models)

and with the parking brake fully applied,

position the floor mat in the floorwell so

that the floor mat grommet holes are

aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position (Continu-

ously Variable Transmission models)

and with the parking brake applied, fully

apply and release all pedals. The floor

mat must not interfere with pedal op-

eration or prevent the pedal from re-

turning to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

LAI2002

7-6 Appearance and care

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the

seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered

vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may re-

duce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet

cleansing agent may be used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Positioning hooks

LAI2003

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations ...........8-4

Engine cooling system ..........................8-5

Checking engine coolant level ................8-6

Changing engine coolant.....................8-6

Engine oil........................................8-7

Checking engine oil level .....................8-7

Changing engine oil and oil filter ..............8-7

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid .............................................8-11

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) .......................8-11

Brake fluid ......................................8-12

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-12

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-12

Battery.........................................8-14

Jump starting ...............................8-16

Drive belt .......................................8-16

Spark plugs ....................................8-17

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-17

Air cleaner......................................8-17

In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-18

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-18

Cleaning ....................................8-18

Replacing ...................................8-19

Brakes..........................................8-20

Fuses...........................................8-21

Engine compartment .......................8-21

Passenger compartment....................8-22

Battery replacement ...........................8-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ......................8-23

Lights ..........................................8-25

Headlights...................................8-25

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-25

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-26

Wheels and tires................................8-28

Tire pressure ................................8-28

Tire labeling .................................8-32

Types of tires ................................8-34

Tir

e chains ..................................8-35

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-36

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Move the shift le-

ver to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when perform-

ing any parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even

if the ignition switch is in the OFF po-

sition and the engine is not running.

To avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for service of the fuel filter or

fuel lines.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed en-

gine oil, engine coolant and/or other

vehicle fluids can damage the envi-

ronment. Always conform to local

regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or Continu-

ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re-

lated component harnesses discon-

nected while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ35DD engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Drive belt location

4. Fuse box

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse box

9. Fuse/Fusible link box

10. Battery

11. Engine oil dipstick

12. Radiator cap

13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3291

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or

equivalent coolant), including Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Cool-

ant (green), or the use of non-distilled

water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory-fill coolant. For addi-

tional information, refer to the "Main-

tenance and schedules" section of

this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level

䊊

, add coolant

to the MAX level

䊊

. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level

䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the en-

gine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2860

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks

䊊

. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark

䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not fill oil level above H (High)

mark

䊊

6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the sever-

ity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL

FILTER

For additional information on engine oil

and oil filter change, refer to the instruc-

tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-

ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 min-

utes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack

stands.

∙ Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

∙ A suitable adapter should be attached

to the jack stand saddle.

LDI3014 WDI0214

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

䊊

Oil filler cap

LDI3357

䊊

Oil drain plug

LDI3349

8-8 Do-it-yourself

Removal of engine protectors

1. Remove pins

䊊

and right engine pro-

tector.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench

by turning it counterclockwise and

completely drain the oil.

䊊

Oil filter

LDI3350

䊊

Right engine protector

LDI3355

LDI3356

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Remove the oil filter by turning it by

hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-

face with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

an oil leak and engine damage.

∙ The dipstick must be inserted in place

to prevent oil spillage from the dip-

stick hole when filling the engine with

oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a

slight resistance is felt, then tighten ad-

ditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb (15.0 to 21.0 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with

a new washer. Securely tighten the

drain plug with a wrench. Do not use

excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)

9. Refill the engine with the recom-

mended oil through the oil filler open-

ing, and install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information about drain and

refill capacity, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual. The drain and refill ca-

pacity depends on the oil temperature and

drain time. Use these specifications for ref-

erence only. Always use the dipstick to de-

termine the proper amount of oil in the

engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required. Turn the engine off

and wait more than 15 minutes. Check

the oil level with the dipstick. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse

order of removal.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the

ground.

3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re-

minder. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

∙ Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

∙ Check your local regulations.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as rec-

ommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid

is required,it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the

fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to

86ºF (0 to 30ºC). The fluid level can be

checked with the level gauge which is at-

tached to the cap. To check the fluid level,

remove the cap. The fluid level should be

between the MAX

䊊

and MIN

䊊

lines.

If the fluid is below the MIN

䊊

line, add

Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Re-

move the cap and fill through the opening.

WARNING

Power steering fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.

∙ Use of a power steering fluid other

than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or

equivalent will prevent the power

steering system from operating

properly.

LDI2861

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can dam-

age the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked contain-

ers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake fluid is below the MIN line

䊊

, the

brake warning light will illuminate. Add

brake fluid up to the MAX line

䊊

. For addi-

tional information on brake fluid type, refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,

the brake system should be thoroughly

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

LDI2147 LDI2583

BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir. Do not use the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

䊊

No smoking, No exposed flames, No

Sparks

Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

䊊

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or

battery acid.

䊊

Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

䊊

Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

䊊

Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

䊊

Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or

injury.

BATTERY

8-14 Do-it-yourself

∙ If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is

maintenance free and battery fluid

should not be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

or a qualified specialist workshop to

confirm the battery’s performance.

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of bak-

ing soda and water.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury. Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not tip the battery.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

This battery is not equipped with remov-

able vent caps.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pul-

ley

3. Generator pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position before servic-

ing drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule found

in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

LDI3302

VQ35DD engine

LDI2131

DRIVE BELT

8-16 Do-it-yourself

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-

tipped

䊊

spark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or oth-

ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter

not only cleans the intake air, it also

stops the flame if the engine back-

fires. If the air cleaner is not installed

and the engine backfires, you could be

burned. Never drive with the air

cleaner filter off. Be cautious working

on the engine when the air cleaner is

off.

SDI1895 LDI3015

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-17

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner,

push the tabs

䊊

and pull the cover up-

ward.

The viscous paper type filter element

should not be cleaned and reused. Replace

the air filter according to the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside

of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the clips

䊊

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry

of airborne dust and pollen particles and

reduces some objectionable outside

odors. The filter is located behind the glove

box. For additional information, refer to the

"Maintenance and schedules" section of

this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-

low the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push the release tab

䊊

3. Move the wiper blade

䊊

down and re-

move.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-

ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle

䊊

. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield-washer operation. If wax gets

into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or

small pin

䊊

LDI2757

LDI2710

Do-it-yourself 8-19

Rear window wiper blade

If checking or replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If the brakes do not operate properly have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-

adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-

plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

BRAKES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and en-

gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-

vided and can be found in the passenger

compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come

on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing

the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

The fuse puller is located in the fuse

block in the passenger compartment.

LDI2385 LDI3117

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

5. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with a

new fuse

䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition, check

the fusible links. If any of these fusible links

are melted, replace with only Genuine

NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse

䊊

5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall the box

cover.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LDI0456 LDI3235 LDI0456

8-22 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver

䊊

into the slit

䊊

of the corner and twist it

to separate the upper part from the

lower part. Place a cloth over the

screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-23

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the stor-

age capacity.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with

䊊

and

䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the op-

eration.

If you need assistance with replacement, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

LDI2637

8-24 Do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb (if so equipped)

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment

is necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the

lenses of the exterior lights in the rain or in

a car wash. A temperature difference be-

tween the inside and the outside of the

lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunc-

tion. If large drops of water collect inside

the lens, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-

quired, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low 55 H11

Park/ Daytime running — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low — —

Park/ Daytime running — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Front fog lights (if so equipped) 55 H11

Door mirror turn signal* — —

Map light* — —

Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158

Personal lights* 8 —

Glove box light* 1.4 —

Step light (if so equipped)* 5 168

Courtesy light* — —

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* 1.8 —

Cargo light* 8 —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light*

Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W

Turn 21 WY21W

Side marker 5 W5W

Backup (reversing)* 16 921

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion.

LDI3106

8-26 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly

2 Map light

3. Door mirror turn signal

4. Step light (if so equipped)

5. Fog light (if so equipped)

6. Personal light

7. Cargo light

8. High-mounted stop light

9. License plate light

10. Rear combination light

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

WDI0263

Do-it-yourself 8-27

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could aversely effect

electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays

pressure of all tires (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by send-

ing a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating tires

to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. For additional information,

refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire

Alert” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

Spare tire size.

䊊

Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-

hicle loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

LDI2737

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/65R18

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/55R20

35 psi, 240 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

255/60R18

36 psi, 250 kPa

Spare Tire:

T165/90D18

60 psi, 420 kPa

LDI0393

Do-it-yourself 8-31

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

Tire Identification Number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

䊊

Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

Example

WDI0394

Example

WDI0395

8-32 Do-it-yourself

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

䊊

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-33

䊊

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-

ers.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

䊊

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission

and differential gears.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be in-

stalled on 235/55R20 or 255/60R18 size

tires. Installation of the tire

chains/cables on 235/55R20 or

255/60R18 size tires will cause damage

to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire

chains/cables, you should install

235/65R18 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

Do-it-yourself 8-35

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tire

size. Other types may damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0258

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-37

∙ For 2WD models, if your vehicle was

originally equipped with four tires

that were the same size and you are

only replacing two of the four tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle

may cause loss of vehicle control in

some driving conditions and cause an

accident and personal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad wear. For additional information

on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission, transfer case

and differential gears.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

∙ The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at the

first opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Do-it-yourself 8-39

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional Maintenance Items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-7

Standard maintenance.......................9-8

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-10

Severe driving conditions....................9-10

Maintenance log ................................9-11

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are fully qualified to work on

NISSAN vehicles before work begins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is

recommended that you ask your NISSAN

dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified

Collision Center is located, or go to

http://collision.nissanusa.com.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect un-

even or abnormal tire wear, there may be a

need for wheel alignment. If the steering

wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway

speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility. It is recom-

mended that you have a damaged wind-

shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a

NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate

a collision center in your area, refer to

http://collision.nissanusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a

fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held

securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)

position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for maintenance free batter-

ies): This vehicle is equipped with a sealed

maintenance free battery. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

service.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold, with

the engine off. Check the lines for proper

attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust may form on the

floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the

exhaust system. At the end of winter, the

underbody should be thoroughly flushed

with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, refer to

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE:

Mixing any other type of coolant or the

use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of the

coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity, refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if

valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-

ance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-

ness. Tighten connections or replace parts

as necessary.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the same type as origi-

nally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,

deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified

intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter

more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage,

looseness, and grease leakage.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “Explanation of general

maintenance items” in this section. When

rotating tires, check for damage and un-

even wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil

and transfer case oil: Visually inspect for

signs of leakage at specified intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads,

replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect

the fluid deterioration data using a CON-

SULT. If the deterioration data is more than

210000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/96 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using

a car-top carrier.

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/96 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

7. 5

(12)

(24)

22.5

(36)

(48)

37.5

(60)

(72)

52.5

(84)

(96)

67.5

(108)

(120)

82.5

(132)

(144)

97.5

(156)

105

(168)

112.5

(180)

120

(192)

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R R

Brake fluid夝 RR R R

Brakelinesandcables IIIIIIII

Brake pads and rotors夝 IIIIIIII

CVTfluid NOTE(2)IIIIIIII

Drive belts NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I*

Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil & oil filter夝 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR

EVAP vapor lines & Fuel lines I* I* I* I*

Exhaust system夝 II I I

Fuel filter NOTE (6)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R R

In-cabinmicrofilter RRRRRRRR

Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (7)

Propeller shaft (AWD models) & drive shaft boots夝 IIIIIIII

Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) NOTE (8) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts夝 II I I

Tire rotation NOTE (9)

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil NOTE (10) I I I I IIII

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”

(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every

60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT

fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

(3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

(8) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(9) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in the section

(10) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.The owner need not perform

such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and

intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

The maintenance intervals shown on the

preceding pages are for normal operating

conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated

under severe driving conditions as shown

below, more frequent maintenance must

be performed on the following items as

shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a

car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil & oil filter Replace Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-12

Maintenance and schedules

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Miles ( km) or

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14

Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-4

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .......................10-7

Specifications ..................................10-8

Engine ......................................10-8

Wheels and tires.............................10-9

Dimensions and weights ....................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................10-10

Vehicle identification ..........................10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate .......................................10-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...........................10-10

Engine serial number........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Emission control information label ..........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label .........10-12

Air conditioner specification label...........10-12

Installing front license plate....................10-12

Vehicle loading information ................... 10-13

Terms ...................................... 10-13

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-14

Securing the load...........................10-15

Loading tips ................................10-16

Measurement of weights ...................10-16

Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17

Maximum load limits ....................... 10-17

Towing load/specification ..................10-20

Towing safety ..............................10-21

Flat towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) .............................10-29

Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) .............................10-30

Uniform tire quality grading....................10-30

Emission control system warranty............. 10-31

eporting safety defects ......................10-32

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-33

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-34

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-34

The following are approximate capaci-

ties. The actual refill capacities may be

slightly different. When refilling, follow

the procedure described in the “Do-it-

yourself” section to determine the

proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 74 L 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in

this section.

Engine oil*

Drain and refill

* For additional

information, refer to “En-

gine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this

manual.

With oil filter

change

4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is

recommended.

• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a syn-

thetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used.

Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other

than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.

Without oil filter

change

4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir

9.8 L 2-5/8 gal 2-1/8 gal

• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid

———

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

(or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other

fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN

CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered un-

der NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Differential gear oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-synthetic

API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 75W-90

• The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may

cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle

repairs.

Transfer fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid super GL-5 80W-90 or

equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — —

• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.

• Use of power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF

may prevent the power steering system from operating

properly.

Brake fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent

DOT 3

• Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Windshield-washer fluid 5 L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system

refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH-PS or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system

refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙

Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely af-

fect vehicle performance and vehicle

emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,

NISSAN A/C system oil Type DH-PS or the

exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

may cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service. A

NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians

and equipment needed to recover and re-

cycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model VQ35DD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels Offset in (mm) Size

Alloy 1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J

Alloy 1.97(50) 20x7.5J

T-type (Steel spare) 0.98 (25) 18 x 4T

Tire size

235/65R18

255/60R18

235/55R20

Spare tire

Temporary spare T165/90D18

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

with front license plate bracket in (mm) 198.5 (5,042)

Overall width

with S, SV, SL and Platinum in (mm) 77.3 (1,963)

with Rock Creek Edition in (mm) 78.7 (1,998)

Overall height

without roof rack in (mm) 69.5 (1,766)

with roof rack in (mm) 70.6 (1,793)

with antenna in (mm) 75.3 (1,913)

Front and Rear Track in (mm) 65.7 (1,670)

Wheelbase in (mm) 114.2 (2,900)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.

M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel” on the center pillar

between the driver’s

side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The VIN plate is located as shown. This

number is the identification for your vehicle

and is used in the vehicle registration.

The VIN number is also available through

the center display screen. For additional

information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

LTI2050 LTI2028

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

LTI2255 WTI0172 WTI0198

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed to the underside of the hood as

shown.

To mount the front license plate, attach the

license plate bracket to the bumper fascia

at the location marks (small dimples) using

the two provided screws

䊊

LTI2251 WTI0173 LTI2241

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Example

LTI2320

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the

cargo area as shown. The hooks can be

used to secure cargo with ropes or other

types of straps.

When securing items using luggage

hooks located on the side finisher do not

apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N)

to a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on

the floor should have loads less than

110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

Cargo area luggage hooks

LIC3684

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ The child restraint top tether strap

may be damaged by contact with

items in the cargo area. Secure any

items in the cargo area. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in a

collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause personal

injury.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a seri-

ous accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

10-16

Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your vehicle

wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

Remember that towing a trailer places ad-

ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drive train, steering, braking and other sys-

tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed

the value specified in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart found in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight.

∙ When towing a trailer load of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers

with a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value

specified in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of

the towing vehicle (including passengers

and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-

ing loads greater than these or using im-

proper towing equipment could adversely

affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is

not only related to the maximum trailer

loads, but also the places you plan to tow.

Tow weights appropriate for level highway

driving may have to be reduced for low

traction situations (for example, on slippery

boat ramps).

LTI2041

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Temperature conditions can also affect

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer

in high outside temperatures on graded

roads can affect engine performance and

cause overheating. The engine protection

mode, which helps reduce the chance of

engine damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle

speed may decrease under high load. Plan

your trip carefully to account for trailer and

vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed, pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation. For

additional information, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight

distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-

tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use

the trailer tongue load specified by the

trailer manufacturer. The tongue load

must be within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

WTI0160

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle

Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The GVW equals the

combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-

ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

Towing capacities are calculated assum-

ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-

tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-

tional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will

add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and

trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed

to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,

Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined

Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-

sured using platform type scales com-

monly found at truck stops, highway weigh

stations, building supply centers or salvage

yards.

To determine the available payload capac-

ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all

of the passengers and cargo that are

normally in the vehicle when towing a

trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from

the GVWR. The remaining amount is

the available maximum tongue/king

pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity,

use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing Load/Specification" chart

found in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GCWR. The remaining amount

is the available maximum towing ca-

pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,

weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-

ment and cargo, that are normally in the

trailer when it is towed. Make sure the

Gross trailer weight is not more than the

Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the

trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

LTI2042

Technical and consumer information 10-19

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the

scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle

Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not

more than Front Gross Axle Weight and

Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the speci-

fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo

and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel - 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification" chart

- 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from

“Towing Load/Specification" chart -

9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).

7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lbs. (409 kg) Available for tongue

weight

15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for

towing

900 lbs. (409 kg) Available tongue

weight

/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due to

the passenger and cargo load in the ve-

hicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight

between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or

within the trailer tongue load specification

recommended by the trailer manufacturer.

If the tongue load becomes excessive, re-

arrange the cargo to obtain the proper

tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum

tongue weight specification shown in the

“Towing load/specification” chart even if

the calculated available tongue weight is

greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue

weight is less than 10%, reduce the total

trailer weight to match the available

tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are

within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this

manual are for general reference only.

The safe towing capacity of your vehicle

is affected by dealer and factory in-

stalled options and passenger and

cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle

and trailer as described in this manual

to determine the actual vehicle towing

capacity. Do not exceed the published

maximum towing capacity or the GCWR

or the GVWR shown on the

FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-

sult in an accident causing serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

U.S. and Canada

Maximum Towing Capacity*1 6,000 lbs. (2,722 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 600 lbs. (272 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 11,000 lbs. (4,990 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options re-

quired to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to

the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-

tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow

package includes a receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the

maximum towing capacity of this vehicle

when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and

hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be

towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and

hitch balls are available from a NISSAN

dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-

tional trailer tow package, check the tow-

ing capacity of your bumper hitch or

receiver-type frame mounted hitch.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is

available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or

property damage due to sway caused by

crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-

ing trucks.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than the

weight rating of the hitch components.

Never exceed the weight rating of the

hitch components. Doing so can cause se-

rious personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on the

top of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball

shank should be no more than 1/16”

smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount. There should

be at least 2 threads showing beyond

the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount

and the ball mount is inserted into the

hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball

mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-

tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to

keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball

mount is one that is designed to carry the

whole amount of tongue weight and gross

weight directly on the ball mount and on

the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-

leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars

attach to the ball mount and to the trailer

to distribute the tongue weight (hitch

weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t

carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue

weight transferred through the frame and

pushing down on the front wheels. This

gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class

IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-

ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.

(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing

equipment manufacturers to determine if

they recommend the use of a weight-

distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may

affect the operation of trailer surge

brakes. If you are considering use of a

weight-distributing hitch system with a

surge brake-equipped trailer, check with

the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-

turer to determine if and how this can be

done.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-

face. With the ignition on and the doors

closed, allow the vehicle to stand for

several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point

on the front and rear bumpers at the

center of the vehicle.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-

just the hitch equalizers so that the

front bumper height is within 0 -

.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference

height measured in step 2. The rear

bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If

the rear bumper is higher than the mea-

sured reference height when loaded,

the vehicle may handle unpredictably

which could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and cause serious personal injury or

property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-

feting caused by other vehicles can affect

trailer handling. Sway control devices may

be used to help control these affects. If you

choose to use one, contact a reputable

trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway

control device will work with the vehicle,

hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow

trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.

(907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing

hitch should be used to tow trailers that

weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

trailer hitch equipment that has a

10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rat-

ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-

ing the maximum trailer weights shown in

the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in

this section.

CAUTION

∙ Special hitches which include frame

reinforcements are required for tow-

ing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable

Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts

and hitch balls for pickup trucks and

sport utility vehicles are available at a

NISSAN dealer.

∙ The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

WARNING

∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

∙ To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely

mounted.

Tire pressures

∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-

mended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-

ing and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the

trailer and tire manufacturer’s

specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. The safety

chains should be crossed and should be

attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. The safety chains can be

attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is

mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turn-

ing corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stop light and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a

module/converter that exceeds these

power requirements may damage the

vehicle’s electrical system. See a repu-

table trailer retailer to obtain the proper

equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended

that you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-

table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with

the optional trailer tow package are

equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness con-

nector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat

4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed

to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle.

Adapters are available at auto parts stores

and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most

states require a separate braking system

on trailers with a loaded weight above a

specific amount. Make sure the trailer

meets the local regulations and the regu-

lations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are avail-

able.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-

draulic line running to each trailer wheel.

Surge brakes are activated by the trailer

pushing against the hitch ball when the

tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge

brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system,

there is no hydraulic or electric connection

for brake operation between the tow ve-

hicle and the trailer.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking

systems are activated by an electronic sig-

nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-

cial brake-sensing module). For additional

information, refer to “Electric trailer brake

controller” in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing

equipment make sure the trailer brakes are

properly installed and demonstrate proper

brake function testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller (if

so equipped)

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may

require the installation of an aftermarket

trailer brake controller.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a con-

nector and jumper harness that is specifi-

cally designed to be used when installing

an aftermarket brake controller.

To install the electric trailer brake controller

jumper harness, perform the following pro-

cedure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to

the rearmost position.

Jumper Harness

LTI0117

Technical and consumer information 10-25

2. Locate the jumper harness connector

under the lower portion of the instru-

ment panel. The connector is taped to

the wiring harness

䊊

as indicated.

∙ The connector is marked with a white

tag with “elec brake conn”.

Wire color designation for electric trailer

brake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE

WHITE Vehicle stop lamp

switch to trailer brake

controller.

BLACK Brake controller

ground (-).

WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.

RED/BLUE Not used

GREEN Fused trailer brake

controller battery feed

(B+).

3. Peel off the tape and connect the

jumper harness to the connector.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer

brake controller according to the

manufacturer’s instructions.

Connector Location

LTI2045

Connector

LTI2046

10-26 Technical and consumer information

Pre-towing tips

∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-

loaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the

vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or

nose-down condition; check for im-

proper tongue load, overload, worn sus-

pension or other possible causes of ei-

ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible

in the trailer to keep the trailer center of

gravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half and

40% is in the back half. Also make sure

the load is balanced side to side.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-

tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every

time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors required

for towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-

hicle and trailer so the required clear-

ance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding

of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-

tice turning, stopping and backing up in an

area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-

bility and braking performance will be

somewhat different than under normal

driving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin

or lock to prevent the coupler from in-

advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand. Move

your hand in the direction in which you

want the trailer to go. Make small cor-

rections and back up slowly. If possible,

have someone guide you when you are

backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if you

must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, trans-

mission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the

downhill side of the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,

slowly release the brake pedal until the

blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer

are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the

blocks.

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may

decrease overall stability. Therefore, to

maintain adequate control, reduce your

speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid

long or repeated use of the brakes

when descending a hill, as this reduces

their effectiveness and could cause

overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-

stead provides “engine braking” and re-

duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises

to a high temperature, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s

first 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

do tow, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified in the recom-

mended Maintenance Schedule in the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels

will be closer to the inside of the turn

than your vehicle wheels. To compen-

sate for this, make a larger than normal

turning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be pre-

pared for possible changes in cross-

winds that could affect vehicle han-

dling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to

sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer

as straight ahead as the road condi-

tions allow. This combination will help

stabilize the vehicle.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steer-

ing or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-

ply the brakes and pull to the side of the

road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is

balanced. For additional information,

refer to “Pre-towing tips” in this section.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires

considerably more distance than nor-

mal passing. Remember, the length of

the trailer must also pass the other ve-

hicle before you can safely change

lanes.

∙ Use the Tow Mode or downshift the

transmission to a lower gear for engine

braking when driving down steep or

long hills. This will help slow the vehicle

without applying the brakes.

10-28 Technical and consumer information

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too

long or too frequently. This could cause

the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-

duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-

low for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise

control not be used while towing a

trailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for ve-

hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the

local speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness

connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts

after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at

every break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the

water level to go over the exhaust tail

pipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer

lights before backing the trailer into the

water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section in this

manual.

Tow mode

Using tow mode is recommended when

pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy

load. Push the TOW MODE switch to acti-

vate tow mode. Push the TOW MODE

switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow

mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is turned off.

Tow mode includes the following features:

∙ Grade logic — Adjusts transmission

shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a

load up a grade.

∙ Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — auto-

matically downshifts when driving

down a grade with a trailer or heavy

load to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not

cause any damage. However, fuel

economy may be reduced and the

transmission/engine driving characteris-

tics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 4–WHEEL DRIVE

VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Never flat tow your 4-wheel drive

(4WD) vehicle.

∙ DO NOT tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD)

vehicle with any wheels on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-

hicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow your front wheel drive

continuously variable transmission

vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL

DAMAGE internal transmission parts

due to lack of transmission

lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Continuously Variable

Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-

ously variable transmission, an appropriate

vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the

towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow

the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-30 Technical and consumer information

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades

B and A represent higher levels of perfor-

mance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 10-31

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/

Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-32 Technical and consumer information

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be obtained

from Transport Canada’s Road Safety

Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371

or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

(English speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel

Drive (4WD) should never be tested us-

ing a two wheel dynamometer (such as

the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing), or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in transmis-

sion damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Technical and consumer information 10-33

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-34 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment ......1-9

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-53

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-61

Air bag warning labels ............1-72

Airbagwarninglight..........1-73, 2-16

Air bag warning light,

supplemental ..............1-73, 2-16

Air cleaner ...................8-17

Air cleaner housing filter...........8-17

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ........4-34

Air conditioner specification label . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ............10-7

Heater and air conditioner

controls ..................4-34

Servicing air conditioner ........4-41

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .......2-34

Anchor point locations ...........1-35

Antenna ....................4-42

Antifreeze ...................5-80

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-12

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-73

Armrests....................1-10

Audible reminders ..............2-19

Autolightswitch................2-41

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner ....3-39,3-41

Automatic power window switch. . .2-68

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-36

Automatic door locks .............3-7

Automatic drive positioner ......3-39,3-41

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) ...................2-12,5-58

Battery..................5-80,8-14

Charge warning light...........2-13

Battery replacement ............8-23

Keyfob...................8-23

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-23

Before starting the engine .........5-15

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-16

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-22

Booster seats .................1-49

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-73

Brakefluid.................8-12

Brakelight(Seestoplight).......8-26

Brakesystem...............5-73

Brakewarninglight............2-12

Brakewearindicators.......2-19,8-20

Parking brake operation.........5-21

Self-adjustingbrakes..........8-20

Brake Assist ..................5-74

Brakefluid...................8-12

Brakes.....................8-20

Brakesystem.................5-73

Break-in schedule ..............5-65

Brightness control

Instrument panel.............2-43

Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-11

Bulb replacement ..............8-26

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargoareastoragebin...........2-64

Cargolight...................2-74

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information).....10-13

Car phone or CB radio ...........

4-42

Check tire pressure..............2-31

Childrestraints.......1-27, 1-28, 1-30, 1-32

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System.............1-32

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49

Top tether strap anchor point

locations..................1-35

Child restraint with top tether strap . . .1-34

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-19

Cleaningexteriorandinterior .....7-2,7-4

Climate-controlled seat switches.....2-45

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Coldweatherdriving............5-80

Compass .....................2-8

Console box ..................2-60

Console light ..................2-73

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .......................5-16

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-11

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-16

Controls

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-34

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol ..............5-41,5-41

Cupholders...................2-62

Daytime Running Light System.......2-43

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-39

Dimensions and weights...........10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-43

Door locks ....................3-5

Drivebelt ....................8-16

Drive positioner, Automatic ......3-39,3-41

Driving

Coldweatherdriving...........5-80

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-16

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Drivingthevehicle...............5-16

Dual panel moonroof.............2-69

Dual power moonroof ............2-69

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH .............2-53

Economy - fuel .................5-67

Emergency engine shutoff .......5-13,6-2

Emission control information label . . . .10-11

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-31

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-15

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-7

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Engine cooling system ..........8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

Engine serial number...........10-11

Engine specifications ...........10-8

Starting the engine ............5-15

Engine Block Heater..............5-81

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6

EventDatarecorders............10-34

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items.......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........2-57

Eyeglasscase..................2-61

Flashers

(Seehazardwarningflasherswitch)....6-2

Flattire......................6-3

Floormatpositioningaid...........7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-12

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-11

Engine coolant ...............8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Windshield-washer fluid .........

8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11

Foglightswitch................2-44

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-61

Front-door pocket ..............2-58

Front power seat adjustment ........1-5

Frontseats....................1-2

11-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-67

Fuel-filler door and cap..........3-30

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Fueloctanerating.............10-6

Fuel recommendation ..........10-4

Loose fuel cap warning..........2-31

Fuelefficientdrivingtips...........5-66

Fuel-filler door .................3-30

Fuel gauge ....................2-7

Fuses .......................8-21

Fusiblelinks...................8-22

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver..........2-74,2-75,2-77,2-78

Gascap.....................3-30

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Odometer ..................2-5

Speedometer..............2-4,2-5

Tachometer .................2-6

Trip odometer .............2-4,2-5

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-60

Gloveboxlock.................2-60

Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-40

Headlightcontrolswitch...........2-40

Headlights...................8-25

Headrestraints.................1-12

Heated 2nd row seat switches .......2-47

Heatedseats..................2-45

Heated seat switches ............2-46

Heated steering wheel switch ....2-48,2-49

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-34

Heater operation .............4-35

Hill descent control switch .........2-50

Hill descent control system .........5-78

Hill start assist system ............5-78

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver..........2-74,2-75,2-77,2-78

Hood .......................3-23

Hook

Luggage hook ...............2-64

Horn.......................2-45

Ignition switch

Push-button ignition switch .......5-11

Immobilizer system...........2-35,5-14

Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11

In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-18

Increasing fuel economy...........5-67

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-11, 2-16

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-36

Instrument brightness control .......2-43

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-43

Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4) .............5-67

Intelligent Around View Monitor .......4-11

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) .......5-43

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range ............3-9

Key operation ................3-10

Mechanical key ...............3-3

Remote keyless entry operation ....

3-13

Troubleshooting guide ..........3-18

Warning signals ..............3-18

Interiorlight...................2-72

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-32

Jumpstarting..............6-10,8-16

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ........8-23

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .......3-13

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ........3-2,3-7

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys......................3-4

11-3

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11

Emission control information label . .10-11

Engine serial number...........10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-72

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-32

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL).....2-43

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-12

Liftgate.....................3-23

Liftgaterelease................3-28

Light

Airbagwarninglight........1-73, 2-16

Brakelight(Seestoplight)........8-26

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-11

Bulb replacement .............8-26

Charge warning light ...........2-13

Console light ................2-73

ExteriorandInteriorlights........8-26

Foglights..................8-25

Foglightswitch..............2-44

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-40

Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-40

Headlights.................8-25

Interiorlight.................2-72

Lightbulbs.................8-25

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-13

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-31

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-64

Personal lights ...............2-73

Security indicator light ..........2-18

Spotlights(Seemaplight)........2-73

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-11, 2-16

Lights......................8-25

Maplights..................2-73

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-7

Door locks ..................3-5

Gloveboxlock...............2-60

Liftgaterelease..............3-28

Power door locks ..............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning............2-31

Lowfuelwarninglight.........2-15,2-30

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-13

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light........................2-31

Luggage hook .................2-64

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ........2-65

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-13

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-27

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-11

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-10

Malfunctionindicatorlight..........2-17

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Maplights....................2-73

Map pocket...................2-58

Memory Seat ...............3-39,3-41

Meters and gauges...............2-4

Instrument brightness control .....2-43

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-36

Outsidemirrors..............3-37

Rearview...................3-36

Vanitymirror................3-35

Mirrors......................3-36

Moonroof..................2-69, 7-5

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ......4-27

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ......4-2

NISS

AN Intelligent Key® ..........3-2,3-7

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System..................2-35,5-14

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6

Odometer ....................2-5

11-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-7

Changing engine oil filter .........8-7

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-7

Outsidemirrors................3-37

Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-61

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-12

Owner's manual order form ........10-34

Owner's manual/service manual order

information..................10-34

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-21

Parking/parkingonhills.........5-72

Parkingbrake..................5-21

Personal lights .................2-73

Power

Front seat adjustment ...........1-5

Power door locks ..............3-6

Poweroutlet.............2-55,2-56

Powerrearwindows...........2-67

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Power steering system..........5-72

Powerwindows..............2-66

Rearpowerwindows...........2-67

Powerinverterswitch ............2-52

Poweroutlet...............2-55,2-56

Powersteering.................5-72

Powersteeringfluid..............8-11

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions .................5-7

Precautions on booster

seats............1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-18

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-53

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Push starting ..................6-12

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-42

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M) test ....................10-33

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA) .......5-32

Rear Door Alert .............2-33,2-54

Rearpowerwindows.............2-67

Rear Sonar System (RSS)...........5-79

Rearviewmirror................3-36

RearViewMonitor................4-3

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch......................2-39

Rear window wiper and washer

switches.....................2-38

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-34

Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7

Registering a vehicle in another country

..........................10-10

Remote Engine Start ..........3-20,5-16

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-32

Roofrack....................2-65

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-7

Childseatbelts......1-30, 1-37, 1-43, 1-49

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-32

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3

Front power seat adjustment ......1-5

Rear seat adjustment ...........1-7

Second row bench seats .........1-9

Seatback pockets ...............2-59

at belt

Childsafety.................1-27

Infants and small children ........1-28

InjuredPerson................1-21

Largerchildren...............1-28

Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-18

Pregnant women..............1-21

Seat belt extenders ............1-26

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-27

Seatbelts................1-18, 7-7

Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-21

Seat belt extenders ..............1-26

Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-21, 2-15

11-5

Seats

2nd row bench seat adjustment.....1-9

Adjustment ..................1-2

Armrests...................1-10

Automatic drive positioner ....3-39,3-41

Frontseats..................1-2

Heatedseats................2-45

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Security indicator light ............2-18

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ..........2-35,5-14

Security systems

Vehicle security system .........2-34

Self-adjustingbrakes.............8-20

Service manual order form.........10-34

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-41

Sonar

Rear system ................5-79

Spark plug replacement ...........8-17

Spark plugs ...................8-17

Specifications .................10-8

Speedometer................2-4,2-5

Speedometer and odometer ........2-4

Spotlights(Seemaplight)..........2-73

SRS warning label ...............1-72

Standard maintenance ..........9-7,9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-15

Jumpstarting............6-10,8-16

Precautions when starting and

driving .....................5-2

Push starting ................6-12

Starting the engine ............5-15

Starting the engine ..............5-15

Steering

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Powersteeringsystem..........5-72

Steering wheel .................3-33

Stoplight....................8-26

Storage.....................2-58

Storagebin...................2-64

Storagetray..................2-59

Sunglasses case ................2-61

Sunglasses holder ...............2-61

Sunroof ...................2-69,7-5

Sunvisors....................3-34

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-72

Supplemental air bag warning

light.....................1-73, 2-16

Supplemental front impact air bag

system ......................1-61

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels.....1-72

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-53

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-53

Switch

Autolightswitch..............2-41

Automatic power window switch . . .2-68

Foglightswitch..............2-44

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-40

Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-40

Hill descent control switch .......2-50

Instrument brightness control .....2-43

Power door lock switch ..........3-6

Powerinverterswitch ..........2-52

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-39

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-38

Tow mode switch .............2-53

Turn signal switch .............2-43

Tachometer ...................2-6

emperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ...............2-35, 5-14

Three-waycatalyst...............5-2

Tire

Flattire....................6-3

Spare tire................6-5,8-39

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Tire chains .................8-35

Tire pressure ................8-28

Tirerotation................8-36

Tires of 4-wheel drive...........8-38

Types of tires ................8-34

Uniform tire quality grading ......10-30

Wheels and tires ..........8-28,10-9

Wheel/tire size ...............10-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-13

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3

Toptetherstrapchildrestraint.......1-34

Towing

2-wheel drive models ...........6-15

Flattowing.............10-29,10-30

Towing load/specification .......10-20

Towtrucktowing .............6-13

Trailertowing...............10-17

Towingatrailer................10-17

Tow mode switch ...............2-53

11-6

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver........2-74,2-75,2-77,2-78

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-11

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-16

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country).....................10-10

Trip odometer ...............2-4,2-5

Turn signal switch ...............2-43

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-30

USB/iPod® Charging Ports ..........4-41

Vanitymirror..................3-35

Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFFswitch...................2-50

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-75

Vehicle identification .............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number)...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system......2-35,5-14

Vehicleinformationdisplay.........2-19

Vehicle loading information ........10-13

Vehiclerecovery................6-16

Vehicle security system ...........2-34

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-35, 5-14

Vents.......................4-32

Visors......................3-34

Warning

Airbagwarninglight........1-73, 2-16

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-12

Battery charge warning light ......2-13

Brakewarninglight............2-12

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loose fuel cap warning..........2-31

Lowfuelwarninglight.......2-15,2-30

Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-13

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-31

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-64

Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-21, 2-15

Supplemental air bag warning

light...................1-73, 2-16

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system .........2-34

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-11, 2-16

Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-72

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders .................2-11, 2-16

Audible reminders ..........2-11, 2-16

Indicatorlights............2-11, 2-16

Warninglights.............2-11, 2-16

Warninglights...............2-11, 2-16

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-11

Warningsystemsswitch...........2-51

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-38

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9

Wheels and tires ............8-28,10-9

Wheel/tire size .................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows ....................2-66

Locking passengers' windows .....2-67

Powerrearwindows...........2-67

Powerwindows..............2-66

Rearpowerwindows...........2-67

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-12

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-18

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-38

Wiper blades ................8-18

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-37

11-7

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-

dex) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85.Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙

Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely af-

fect vehicle performance and vehicle

emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are

labeled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

Refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

label.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2020 Nissan Pathfinder

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2020 NISSAN PATHFINDER Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor DQ9003H3 Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set for Nissan Infiniti EX35 High Performance and Reliability

Vevor DQ9003B Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 6 Compatible with Nissan Infiniti

Vevor Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 4 for Nissan Altima Versa Reliable Performance and Compatibility

DK2 86625 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Titan '04-'15, Armada '04-'15

DK2 Mount Kit for Nissan Frontier Pickup 05-18, Xterra 05-14, Pathfinder 05-15 - Custom Fit and Easy Installation

DK2 86620 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Frontier Pickup '98-'04, Xterra '99-'04